<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en-GB">
	<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Paul.Spann</id>
	<title>Standout Property Manager Wiki Help - User contributions [en-gb]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Paul.Spann"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Paul.Spann"/>
	<updated>2026-05-07T00:30:13Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.36.2</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=The_Dashboard&amp;diff=643</id>
		<title>The Dashboard</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=The_Dashboard&amp;diff=643"/>
		<updated>2026-04-09T11:11:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Main area */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= What is the Dashboard? =&lt;br /&gt;
The dashboard is the main layout of Standout Property Manager, it is how the system is accessed and worked on, and can be broken down into the three areas as listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Toolbar&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of your browser, the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Toolbar&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; displays options that are available on each and every screen displayed in Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toolbar.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A quick explanation of these options are as follows:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notifications ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Notification 01.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you have any notifications that require your attention, a counter will be display next indicating how many notifications you need to respond to. Notifications may be an upcoming appointment, a brochure that has been converted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Page Help ====&lt;br /&gt;
Displays a popup help box that explains the current page or section that you have displayed. A link to the full help system should be displayed at the top, opening the full help system in a new browser tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Colleagues ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Colleagues 01.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
A list of all your fellow colleagues, a green icon indicates that they’re currently logged in. If you want to send them (regardless of their logged in status) a sticky note message, click on the little yellow sticky note to see the following:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Colleagues 02.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your message and then click Save for it to be displayed on their browser. You will see:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On your colleagues browser, a Notification will appear in their Toolbar:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Colleagues 03.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When they go back to the Dashboard, your message will be displayed near the top right of their browser:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Notification 03.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Editing your profile ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change the information, configuration or settings for your Standout profile, click your name:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Profile 01.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your profile will then open in a new browser tab. Please view our detail documentation regarding your profile configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Log Out ====&lt;br /&gt;
This simply logs you out of Standout and returns you to the Login screen. We recommend doing this when you’re away from your computer/device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Navigation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
The left hand navigation is how we work woth elements of Standout Property Manager, each element is briefly described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo Area ====&lt;br /&gt;
The very top of the navigation bar will generally be your own agency logo, and is just used to make the sftware more personal to your own agency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Quick Search ====&lt;br /&gt;
The quick serach can be used to search for a property or a contact, just type in a name, address, reference number, telephone number or email address then press enter, the system will then return anything that it thinks is valid for the information given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Dashboard ====&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting Dashboard will return you to the dashboard screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Tawk To =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Task list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Properties ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Telephone wizard ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Add property ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Property list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Progress ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rental ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Bulk rental payments ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tenant list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landlord list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contacts ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Add contact ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contacts to delete ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Hot contacts ====&lt;br /&gt;
Think of Hot contacts as your Hot Box, the list of contacts that you relly want to deal with, cash buyers etc, click [https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview#Heat_Rating here] for more information on Hot contacts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Online Manuals ===&lt;br /&gt;
You guessed, the online manuals is the Standout Wiki pages your reading now.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Administration ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Smart Dashboard&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Smart Dashboard gives you a flexible overview of your day in Standout. It brings together useful information such as recent properties, recent contacts, diary items, tasks, performance, and local weather in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike the previous dashboard, the Smart Dashboard can be arranged to suit the way you work, so you can keep the panels most important to you where you want them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Rearranging your dashboard ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can personalise the Smart Dashboard by moving the panels into the order that suits you best.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To rearrange the dashboard:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click and hold the panel you want to move.&lt;br /&gt;
Drag it to a new position on the dashboard.&lt;br /&gt;
Release it when it is in the place you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your layout will be saved, so the dashboard should continue to display in your chosen order when you return.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This allows each user to organise the dashboard in the way that best matches their daily workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Office 365 Integration ====&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have logged into Standout, you can choose to link your account to Office 365. This allows appointments created in Standout to also appear in your Outlook Calendar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you log in, Standout will synchronise new and existing future appointments with Outlook. If you need to make changes to an appointment, you should always edit it in Standout, not Outlook, so that the synchronisation continues correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you create an appointment for another member of staff, the appointment may still appear in your Outlook calendar, but the notes will make it clear who is attending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Your recently edited listings ====&lt;br /&gt;
This panel shows properties that you have recently created or edited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information displayed may include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
main photo&lt;br /&gt;
property reference&lt;br /&gt;
contract&lt;br /&gt;
status&lt;br /&gt;
price&lt;br /&gt;
display address&lt;br /&gt;
quick link to edit&lt;br /&gt;
for rental properties, a quick link to Agreements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also see shortcuts to view All properties and All businesses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Your recently edited contacts ====&lt;br /&gt;
This panel shows contacts that you have recently created or edited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information displayed may include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
title&lt;br /&gt;
first name&lt;br /&gt;
surname&lt;br /&gt;
contact type, for example Applicant, Tenant, Landlord, Vendor, Contractor, or Solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A quick link is provided so you can open and edit the contact record directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also see a shortcut to view All contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Today&amp;#039;s appointments and outstanding tasks ====&lt;br /&gt;
This panel shows appointments and tasks that are assigned to you for today.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking an item, you will be taken to the Diary, where you can view the full details and update them if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also see quick actions such as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View diary – opens today’s Diary&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task – allows you to add a new task&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Performance Chart ====&lt;br /&gt;
This panel provides an overview of property performance over recent months.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is designed to give you a quick visual summary of activity, such as properties that have been Let, Completed, or Withdrawn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is intended as an at-a-glance performance view rather than a detailed report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Local weather ====&lt;br /&gt;
This panel displays the local weather using the town or postcode held in your branch configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides a useful forecast for the current day and the coming days ahead. This can be especially helpful when planning property photography or viewings, as good weather can make a property more appealing.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=The_Dashboard&amp;diff=642</id>
		<title>The Dashboard</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=The_Dashboard&amp;diff=642"/>
		<updated>2026-04-09T11:08:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Version x.x.x What’s New? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= What is the Dashboard? =&lt;br /&gt;
The dashboard is the main layout of Standout Property Manager, it is how the system is accessed and worked on, and can be broken down into the three areas as listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Toolbar&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
At the top of your browser, the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Toolbar&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; displays options that are available on each and every screen displayed in Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Toolbar.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A quick explanation of these options are as follows:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notifications ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Notification 01.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you have any notifications that require your attention, a counter will be display next indicating how many notifications you need to respond to. Notifications may be an upcoming appointment, a brochure that has been converted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Page Help ====&lt;br /&gt;
Displays a popup help box that explains the current page or section that you have displayed. A link to the full help system should be displayed at the top, opening the full help system in a new browser tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Colleagues ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Colleagues 01.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
A list of all your fellow colleagues, a green icon indicates that they’re currently logged in. If you want to send them (regardless of their logged in status) a sticky note message, click on the little yellow sticky note to see the following:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Colleagues 02.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your message and then click Save for it to be displayed on their browser. You will see:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On your colleagues browser, a Notification will appear in their Toolbar:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Colleagues 03.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When they go back to the Dashboard, your message will be displayed near the top right of their browser:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Notification 03.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Editing your profile ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change the information, configuration or settings for your Standout profile, click your name:-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Profile 01.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your profile will then open in a new browser tab. Please view our detail documentation regarding your profile configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Log Out ====&lt;br /&gt;
This simply logs you out of Standout and returns you to the Login screen. We recommend doing this when you’re away from your computer/device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Navigation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
The left hand navigation is how we work woth elements of Standout Property Manager, each element is briefly described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Logo Area ====&lt;br /&gt;
The very top of the navigation bar will generally be your own agency logo, and is just used to make the sftware more personal to your own agency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Quick Search ====&lt;br /&gt;
The quick serach can be used to search for a property or a contact, just type in a name, address, reference number, telephone number or email address then press enter, the system will then return anything that it thinks is valid for the information given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Dashboard ====&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting Dashboard will return you to the dashboard screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Tawk To =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diary ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Task list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Properties ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Telephone wizard ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Add property ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Property list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Progress ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rental ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Bulk rental payments ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tenant list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landlord list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contacts ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Add contact ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact list ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contacts to delete ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Hot contacts ====&lt;br /&gt;
Think of Hot contacts as your Hot Box, the list of contacts that you relly want to deal with, cash buyers etc, click [https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview#Heat_Rating here] for more information on Hot contacts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Online Manuals ===&lt;br /&gt;
You guessed, the online manuals is the Standout Wiki pages your reading now.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Administration ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Main area&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Office 365 Integration ====&lt;br /&gt;
When you have logged into Standout, you can choose to link Standout to your Office 365 account. This will allow appointments to be created in Standout AND in your Outlook Calendar. When you log in, Standout will synchronise appointments (both new and existing future appointments) into your Outlook calendar. If you wish to change an appointment, you must edit them in Standout and NOT Outlook so that synchronisation occurs. If you create an appointment for another member of staff, the appointment will be displayed in your calendar but a message in the notes will tell you that you are not the one attending the appointment.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Your recently edited listings ====&lt;br /&gt;
This area displays properties that you’ve either created or edited. The details displayed are the main photo, the property reference, contract, status, price, display address, quick link to edit, if a rental a quick link to the Agreements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To the right there are quick links to display All properties and/or All businesses. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Your recently edited contacts ====&lt;br /&gt;
This area displays the contacts that you’ve either created or edited. The details displayed are the contact Title, First and Surname and what they are (e.g. Applicant, Tenant, Landlord, Vendor, Contractor, Solicitor). To the right is a quick link to edit their details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To the right there are quick links to display All contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Today&amp;#039;s appointments and outstanding tasks ====&lt;br /&gt;
This area displays appointments and tasks that are assigned to you. By clicking on them, you will be taken to the Diary where the item will be displayed, allowing you to view, or if required, update the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To the right, View diary will take you to the Diary for today. Clicking “Create a task” will allow you to create a new task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Performance Chart ====&lt;br /&gt;
This area displays those properties that have been Let/Completed/Withdrawn over the last twelve months. An informational display to display how successful your agency has been.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Local weather ====&lt;br /&gt;
This area displays the local weather based on town/postcode information provided in your branch configuration. The data displayed will be for the current day and the next seven days. If you want to view a different area, enter a postcode or town to be displayed. This area is displayed to assist in photographing a property, blue skies promote a property far greater than wet days – not that we’re able to change the weather!&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&amp;diff=641</id>
		<title>Property Overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&amp;diff=641"/>
		<updated>2026-04-05T07:45:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Media */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Properties =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin with, the following should be entered:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property reference     A unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch                         Only shown if you have multiple branches, this will then allow you to choose a branch accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date available             When the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Address ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Display Address ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Latitude and Longitude ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Owners ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sitting Tenants ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sitting Tenant.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any viewing appointments (created or updated).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Basics ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basics are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contract                          For Sale / To Let / Auction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New build                    Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sitting Tenant              Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tenure                          Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                     *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reception rooms       number of Reception rooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Let options ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Commercial options ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial type :        Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Business Sales ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business name            the name of the business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price – To Let properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post Price Message     a message after the price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fees ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internal use ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Vendor Invoice ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amount                                   Amount of the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additional settings =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Secondary details ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Agency specific features ===&lt;br /&gt;
Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional features ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;st&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; floor / 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor / Higher than 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor (with lift)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply.  Note: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other questions are simple Yes/No options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sale features ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other questions are simple Yes/No options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Running costs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Council tax band       A – H&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Utilities ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Annual fees ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outside Area ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inside Area ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Descriptions ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp;amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Brief Description ===&lt;br /&gt;
Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Full Description ===&lt;br /&gt;
Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bullet points ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Floors &amp;amp; rooms ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Room name                A required field and the general name of a room&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Virtual Staging ==&lt;br /&gt;
Virtual Staging allows you to create a new AI-generated version of an existing property photograph. This is most useful where a room is empty, sparsely furnished or you wish to show how a room may look when presented as a Bedroom, Living Room, Study or other layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use this feature, first upload and save your photographs as normal. On the Media tab, choose the photograph you wish to use, select the required room setup and click the Virtual Stage button. Standout will then create a new image and add it as a separate photograph. The original image is kept and is not overwritten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Virtual Staging works best with clear, good quality photographs of empty or mostly empty rooms. Images with heavy clutter, strong reflections, poor lighting or objects blocking large parts of the room may produce less accurate results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that each Virtual Staging request has a charge. The cost shown on screen is applied per image generated. As the staged image is added as a separate photograph, you can then choose whether to keep it, re-order it, include it in a brochure or remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that any AI-staged image is checked before marketing to ensure it is suitable and represents the room appropriately. If required, keep both the original and the staged version so there is a clear record of the actual room and the dressed example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inserting a Video URL ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===&lt;br /&gt;
1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&amp;#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &amp;quot;Sign In&amp;quot; and enter your Google account information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &amp;quot;Upload video.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The video upload page should appear. Under &amp;quot;Select files to upload,&amp;quot; click &amp;quot;Public&amp;quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&amp;#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&amp;#039;t go live until a later date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Click &amp;quot;Publish&amp;quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&amp;#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&amp;#039;t appear online unless you click &amp;quot;Publish.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rental ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Certificates ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Advertising ==&lt;br /&gt;
The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Portals ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Board requests ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an advertising board is required for a property the &amp;quot;Board Required&amp;quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hit statistics ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Viewings / offers ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Files ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;rd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Progress ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Matches ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Interested parties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exchange solicitor details ==&lt;br /&gt;
Add additional information to the exchange invoice here, these details will be added to the exchange invoice to the solicitors when created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Staff viewings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No viewings&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Viewings&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When there are viewings, the information returned will be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date / Time of visit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== History ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== More actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=640</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Usage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=640"/>
		<updated>2023-02-03T14:50:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Data synchronisation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts synchronisation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required entries have been created on the Xero accounts setup screen for the branch you will have a new tab in administration &amp;quot;Accounts synchronisation&amp;quot; click on this tab to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Branch selection ======&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).[[File:Administration Accounts Sync Tab.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Xero prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Xero Login screen.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Xero email address, password and be successful. Xero will prompt you to choose the required company to integrate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Data synchronisation ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data Stats.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what is required to synchronise, Standout will display these buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise Contacts ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send all contacts that have either been created or amended since the last synchronisation. You cannot have duplicate contacts (Contacts Name or Company Names) in Xero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise rental invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All rental invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. If a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise sales invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All sales invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. Again, if a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Xero synchronisation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Xero updating Standout ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero integration has been designed to only send invoice payments to Standout and mark those as either paid in full or partially. It is recommended that if a synchronised contact requires a name and/or address update, amendments should be undertaken in Standout and then a contact synchronisation from Standout to Xero ran.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an invoice update occurs, such as entering a payment against an invoice, an update will be sent from Xero to Standout:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental invoice        ​​full and part payments will be recorded in the Financials of a Tenancy Agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales invoices        ​​part payment of an invoice will not be recorded, only when an invoice has been fully paid will it be displayed. To view these ​​​invoices, you can either choose a Contact and then Invoices or ​​​property and then Exchange invoice details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Rental payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause two updates in Standout, the removal of the payment transaction and the amendment of the actual transaction to show either None or Partial payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Sales payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause the invoice in either the Property or Contact invoice tab to shown as Unpaid, rather than paid.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=File:Data_Stats.png&amp;diff=639</id>
		<title>File:Data Stats.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=File:Data_Stats.png&amp;diff=639"/>
		<updated>2023-02-03T14:50:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Data Stats&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=638</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=638"/>
		<updated>2023-01-31T16:31:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Configuring Xero for Standout Integration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration, this MUST be completed before you set up the link in Standout!!!!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Other Income &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the the App Accounts fields (the ones in italic below) are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts link&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Xero Client ID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Xero Client Secret&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Xero Webhooks Key&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send invoices from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Contact Start Date&lt;br /&gt;
|Send contacts from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rental chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=637</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=637"/>
		<updated>2023-01-31T12:10:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Branch configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Other Income &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the the App Accounts fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts link&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Xero Client ID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Xero Client Secret&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Xero Webhooks Key&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send invoices from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Contact Start Date&lt;br /&gt;
|Send contacts from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rental chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=636</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=636"/>
		<updated>2023-01-31T12:09:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Branch configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Other Income &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the the App Accounts fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts link&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Webhooks Key&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send invoices from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Contact Start Date&lt;br /&gt;
|Send contacts from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rental chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=635</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=635"/>
		<updated>2023-01-31T12:08:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Branch configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Other Income &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts link&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Webhooks Key&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key    (LEAVE BLANK)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send invoices from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Contact Start Date&lt;br /&gt;
|Send contacts from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rental chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&amp;diff=634</id>
		<title>Property Overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&amp;diff=634"/>
		<updated>2023-01-30T13:13:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Properties */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Properties =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin with, the following should be entered:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property reference     A unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch                         Only shown if you have multiple branches, this will then allow you to choose a branch accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date available             When the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Address ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Display Address ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Latitude and Longitude ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Owners ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sitting Tenants ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sitting Tenant.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any viewing appointments (created or updated).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Basics ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basics are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contract                          For Sale / To Let / Auction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New build                    Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sitting Tenant              Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tenure                          Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                     *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reception rooms       number of Reception rooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Let options ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Commercial options ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial type :        Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Business Sales ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business name            the name of the business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price – To Let properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post Price Message     a message after the price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fees ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internal use ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Vendor Invoice ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amount                                   Amount of the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additional settings =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Secondary details ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Agency specific features ===&lt;br /&gt;
Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional features ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;st&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; floor / 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor / Higher than 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor (with lift)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply.  Note: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other questions are simple Yes/No options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sale features ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other questions are simple Yes/No options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Running costs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Council tax band       A – H&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Utilities ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Annual fees ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outside Area ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inside Area ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Descriptions ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp;amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Brief Description ===&lt;br /&gt;
Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Full Description ===&lt;br /&gt;
Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bullet points ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Floors &amp;amp; rooms ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Room name                A required field and the general name of a room&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inserting a Video URL ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===&lt;br /&gt;
1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&amp;#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &amp;quot;Sign In&amp;quot; and enter your Google account information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &amp;quot;Upload video.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The video upload page should appear. Under &amp;quot;Select files to upload,&amp;quot; click &amp;quot;Public&amp;quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&amp;#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&amp;#039;t go live until a later date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Click &amp;quot;Publish&amp;quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&amp;#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&amp;#039;t appear online unless you click &amp;quot;Publish.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rental ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Certificates ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Advertising ==&lt;br /&gt;
The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Portals ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Board requests ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an advertising board is required for a property the &amp;quot;Board Required&amp;quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hit statistics ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Viewings / offers ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Files ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;rd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Progress ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Matches ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Interested parties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exchange solicitor details ==&lt;br /&gt;
Add additional information to the exchange invoice here, these details will be added to the exchange invoice to the solicitors when created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Staff viewings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No viewings&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Viewings&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When there are viewings, the information returned will be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date / Time of visit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== History ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== More actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&amp;diff=633</id>
		<title>Property Overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Property_Overview&amp;diff=633"/>
		<updated>2023-01-30T10:13:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Interested parties */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Properties =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a property, it will fall into two categories – For Sale and To Let. Properties can be classed as Residential / Commercial / Business.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prop1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin with, the following should be entered:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property reference     a unique code for this property – either your own code if you have a policy identifying properties or the system can Generate a code for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch                         when you have multiple branches, this will allow you to choose accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date available             when the property will be coming onto the market (not necessarily the date entered onto Standout).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Status                          By default, Standout only allows you to choose certain status(guided),&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To maintain a given “flow” when marketing a property. This can be Configured in Administration / Branch / Settings and then either Free or Guided. When in Free mode, you may choose whichever status you desire. By default a new property will have a status of Pre-Valuation and will automatically update the status as you process the property.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Featured property      for those properties you wish to class as a “Feature Property”, then this sets that option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Address ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Address.png|alt=|thumb|1200x1200px|Property Address Fields|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to Contacts, you enter the address of the property. By default, the Local council will be populated by your default local council (configured in Administration Agency and Branch Settings).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Display Address ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the address that is displayed on your web site and on any portals that you subscribe to. Note if you subscribe to Zoopla there is a set format of the display address that you need to follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Latitude and Longitude ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Lat-Long.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These fields will be populated when the Postcode has been entered, you will then see the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should these not be correct, you are able to manually set both the map and Street View settings. Please note: if Google haven’t recorded the street/area you will not be able to customise this feature. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the position of map markers on your web site and Rightmove just click the Set map button and move the marker to the correct location then close the map and resave the property. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Street View is incorrect you can set the street view camera to point exactly where you need using the Set Street View button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Client match will also not work if these figures are zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Owners ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropOwners.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Either select the current owner by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple owners can be recorded against a property but the system does allow for the defaulting of a Primary contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sitting Tenants ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sitting Tenant.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Either select the current tenant(s) by typing in the first name or you can Create a new contact – please note: a new tab will open in your browser to allow you to create this new contact, once complete, close the tab and continue working. Your new contact should now appear in the search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple tenants can be recorded against a property. This information is used when creating Viewing Appointments and allows you to email the sitting tenants about any viewing appointments (created or updated).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Basics ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyBasics.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The view you get may differ from above depending on your settings ie, if you do not do rentals then that option will not appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basics are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contract                          For Sale / To Let / Auction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New build                    Yes or No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sitting Tenant              Yes or No - this will only be displayed for Sale / Residential properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tenure                          Freehold / Common hold / Leasehold / Share of Freehold / Flying Freehold / Share transfer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Residential type          Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property style             Detached / Semi-Detached / Link Detached / Terraced&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                     *These are the only ones available as dictated by Rightmove&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Year build                    normally entered as a 4 digit year (1970)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bedrooms                   number of bedrooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bathrooms                  number of bathrooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reception rooms       number of Reception rooms in the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Let options ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Proplets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
When you place a property for the rental market, both Residential type and Property Style are not required so disappear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A new option will appear for how this property rental is Managed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No                               You will not be responsible for this property other than it being placed on the market and removed when tenanted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rent collection            You will be responsible for collecting the Rent on the Landlords behalf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes                              You will be responsible for everything regarding the rental of this property and receiving payment from the Tenant, arranging repairs etc and paying the Landlord accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Commercial options ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropCommercial.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The options change when a property is one of a commercial type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial type :        Business Park / Café / Caravan Park / Carehome / Catering / Commercial Property / Development Opportunity / Empty Retail Premises / Farm / Garage / Guest House / Gymnasium / Holiday Flats / Hotel / Industrial Units / Investment Property / Land / Leisure Facility / Mill / Night Club / Nursery / Office / Parking / Permanent Flats / Public House / Restaurant / Retail / Serviced Offices / Shops / Soft Play Centres&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial use Class : N/A / A1 (Shops) / A2 (Financial and professional services) / A3 (Restaurants and cafes) / A4 (Drinking establishments) / A5 (Hot food takeaways) / B1 (Business) / B2 (General Industry) / B3 (Special Industrial Group A) / B4 (Special Industrial Group B) / B5 (Special Industrial Group C) / B6 (Special Industrial Group D) / B7 (Special Industrial Group E) / B8 (Storage or distribution) / C1 (Hotels and hostels) / C2A (Secure Residential Institution) / C3 (Dwelling houses) / D1 (Non-residential institutions) / D2 (Assembly and leisure)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Business Sales ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BasicsBusiness.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business type              a vast array of business types is pre-populated into this drop down selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business name            the name of the business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business hours            a free form text box for you to enter the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price – For Sale properties (Residential / Commercial / Business) ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropPrice.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sale Price                    Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post Price Message     a message after the price, usually things like Cash Back etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Residential Properties only - Standout has details of properties and valuations and as such, this information can be loaded against a property. Click on the Load buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price – To Let properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropPriceLet.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Currency                     Standout can work in various currencies, the ones currently configured are GBP / USD / EUR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flash                            whether you place a flash image over the properties main photo reading New to market / Managers Choice / Reduced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental Price                 Whilst you can enter a price that you’ve agreed with your client, This should really be entered in the first place by confirming a Pre-Valuation Appointment and then entering the recommend price at that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price qualifier              A message before the price – Asking Price / POA / Guide Price / Fixed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Price / Offers in Excess of / OIRO / Sale by Tender / From (New Homes and Commercial Only) / Shared Ownership / Offers Over / Part Buy Part Rent / Shared Equity / Equity Loan / Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post Price Message     a message after the price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let period                   Weekly / Monthly / Quarterly / Annually / Per 4 Weeks / Per Person Per Week&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bond price                  the amount that the Landlord has requested for the Bond.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fees ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropFees.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fees can be set as either a Fixed fee or a Percentage, also with a Minimum fee override. Additionally, you can set the Contractual arrangement as Sole Agency / Joint Sole Agency / Multiple Agency. When choosing Joint or Multiple, you can enter the Other Agency(s) name and the Contractual details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internal use ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropInternalUse.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This area is for staff to enter private notes. As stated in the screen shot, will be visible to all staff but will on appear on your website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Vendor Invoice ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VendorInvoice.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option (More Actions / Vendor Invoice) allows you to create a one off invoice to the Vendor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Date                            the date of the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amount                                   Amount of the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VAT applicable                        if you’re VAT registered, then will add the VAT to the Amount&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description                             the description for the invoice being raised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create                                     create the invoice against the Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close                                       close this form once all invoice(s) have been raised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additional settings =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These additional settings are hopefully where you outshine your competition, by adding as much details as possible, should attract prospective clients for the properties you market. We would always suggest populating as much as possible in regard to the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Secondary details ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Secondary.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Agency specific features ===&lt;br /&gt;
Either start typing a feature of use the dropdown list to enter specific features about this property. For example Adapted Bathroom / Busy Trading Location / Cul-de-sac / Double Glazed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional features ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AdditionalFeatures.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Floors                          Unknown / 0 – 99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usual entrance floor   Unknown / Basement / Ground Floor / 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;st&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; floor / 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor / Higher than 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor (without lift) / Higher than 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;nd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; Floor (with lift)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parking                        Defined list of parking options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Heating                       Defined list of heating options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accessibility                Defined list of Accessibility options, select all that apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outside space             Defined list of Outside space options, select all that apply.  Note: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;selecting Communal Garden seems to remove the property from a garden specific search in Rightmove, as for some reason they do not class a communal garden as a property containing a garden, so use this option with caution.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other questions are simple Yes/No options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sale features ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SaleFeatures.png|left|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Sale by             Not Specified / Private Treaty / By Auction / Confidential / By Tender Offers Invited&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Condition        Unknown / Good / Some work needed / Work required throughout /  Major renovation required / Pristine&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other questions are simple Yes/No options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Running costs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RunningCosts.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rates                          how much is the rates (we recommend the annual fee)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Council tax band       A – H&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Utilities ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Utilities.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Average costs for Gas / Electricity / Water rates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Annual fees ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AnnualFees.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Store Ground rent fee, Estate management fees and Insurance fees, you can also store the renewal dates. When the renewal date occurs, Standout will create an all day appointment to remind you of this renewal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outside Area ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OutsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inside Area ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsideArea.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above allows for entry and conversion of the area of the property both inside and outside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Descriptions ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyDescription.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows the entry of Primary descriptions, Bullet points, Floors &amp;amp; rooms and Additional Descriptions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Brief Description ===&lt;br /&gt;
Up to 1000 characters can be entered which will flow though to your own website and portals. This text is usually shown on the results list of your website and any portals. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Full Description ===&lt;br /&gt;
Entry of a full description that can be formatted similar to Word. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note – if the text looks irregular, select all the text (usually CTRL then A on windows) then use the ‘Remove format’ option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bullet points ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bullets.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to 20 bullet points can be added to the property, click the Add new to add an extra bullet point, it will show you how many are left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Floors &amp;amp; rooms ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropRoom1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Room name                A required field and the general name of a room&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Room dimensions       Entering 10ft x 10ft or 10’5” x 20’6” will convert to the metric by clicking the Convert button. Similarly, the convert will work with 10m x 20m 10.5m x 22.6m&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Room description       A full and concise description of the room to a max of 1000 characters&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Photos                         Up to 4 photos can be uploaded to a floor/room&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exclude from               Standout has the ability to create advertising brochures (using Word&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brochure                     docx as template (see Administration / Brochures) and if required a room/floor can be excluded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add                             Click this button to add the room (rooms/floors appear on right – see below&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropRoom2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Administration / Branch / Default rooms you have the option to create defaults. This option is most used to add Agent Notes, Disclaimers to all properties. Default rooms when added to a property will be at the end of any rooms/floors created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropMedia.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The General media tab allows you to add as many photos as you require for a property, along with a floorplan and a URL to a hosted video (such as YouTube etc). Each photograph can be also be named.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Brochure media tab allows you to re-arrange the photographs in the order that you’d prefer when producing a brochure. All you do is drop and drag the photograph from left/right/right/left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of the above would be that for websites/portals you want the outside front view but, on your brochure, you’d prefer the photograph of their Kitchen/Diner/rear garden as you feel that would attract more interest with a Window Card or hand out brochure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inserting a Video URL ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a video, Standout will only allow the insertion of a URL from a video hosting service such as YouTube or Vimeo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create an account in your chosen video hosting service and then upload the video of a property. You can then share that video, choose the Link option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then paste the link from the video service into the field above. Saving the property will allow our system to update your property on not only your own website but to all your subscribed portals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upload a video to YouTube using a web browser ===&lt;br /&gt;
1. Navigate to YouTube in a web browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Make sure you are logged in. If you don&amp;#039;t see your account avatar in the upper right corner, click &amp;quot;Sign In&amp;quot; and enter your Google account information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Click the Create a video button at the top of the screen. It looks like a video camera. In the drop-down menu, click &amp;quot;Upload video.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The video upload page should appear. Under &amp;quot;Select files to upload,&amp;quot; click &amp;quot;Public&amp;quot; and choose what level of visibility you want for the video — everyone can see a public video, but you can also make it unlisted (it&amp;#039;s still publicly available, but only to people with a direct link), private (meaning only you have access), or Scheduled, which means it won&amp;#039;t go live until a later date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Click the large arrow to choose the video file, or you can simply drag the video file onto the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. While the video uploads, you can enter information like the name and description of the video. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Click &amp;quot;Publish&amp;quot; to complete the process. You can publish the video while it&amp;#039;s still uploading, or wait till the upload is complete. Either way, the video won&amp;#039;t appear online unless you click &amp;quot;Publish.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the video is uploaded, it will take a few minutes to process. The time it takes to process will depend on how long the video is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rental ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rental Tabs.png|alt=|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Due to this subject being complex, see [[Rental Property Overview]] or contact support at support@issl.co.uk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Certificates ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once an EPC Certificate has been issued for a property, if you have received an electronic version, you can upload that to the system by drop/drag the image onto the system. However, if you don’t have one, you can set the ratings of Current and Potential on the system, then by clicking Generate will associate an EPC chart for this property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expiry date can also be entered. Upon saving the property, this will create an all-day event on that date to remind you it’s expired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Advertising ==&lt;br /&gt;
The advertising tab on properties is used for various advertising functions primarily setting which portals a property can appear on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Portals ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to send your properties to all the portals that you subscribe to. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Portals.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can define before putting a property live which portal to send a property too, once the property is live you can not take it off a portal using this method it must be withdrawn and put back to the portals you require once withdrawn from them all. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Rightmove, Zoopla, OnTheMarket and Boomin once a property has been sent to the portal, you can use this tab to see when it was last updated, whether it was successful or not, plus, you’ll be able to click a link to take you directly to that property page on that portals website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Board requests ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BoardRequests.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
If an advertising board is required for a property the &amp;quot;Board Required&amp;quot; must be selected before the property is made available to enable the board management and updates facility for a property. Also, you can choose how many boards are to be requested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right side, you will see the status of what has been requested for the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hit statistics ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Hits.png|alt=|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your website has been created by ISSL, you will be able to see the number of hits on your own website, Rightmove, Zoopla and combined. This will show the number of hits and the number of times it has been returned in search results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Viewings / offers ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Viewings1.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Viewings / offers screen will allow you to, on the left side of this screen enter any specific issues when viewing a property, if you operate a Key Reference system, enter the Key reference and any Alarm details.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Viewings2.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right hand side, you will be able to see all the viewings of this property and any offers from potential buyers/tenants (the above is an example of a tenant).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout the system, Standout offers the ability to create notes, against Contacts and Properties. On the left side the system will show all the notes in a list. For each note, there is an option to Show it or Hide it and the ability to edit it. You are able to upload one file for each note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, if you have a website built by ISSL, you can make the note available for Vendors to see on your website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Files ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Files.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To use this option, you will need either a Dropbox or Google Drive account. Should you obtain external documentation from 3&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;rd&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; parties, a tenant, vendor, landlord, contractor, solicitor you have the ability to upload files to a specific Contact or Property. Additionally, you can create sub folders to hold specific documentation/files instead of just having a huge list of files, as you would organise your desktop files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Progress ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Progress.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can be used to track the progress of a properties status. This part of the system has defaults but you can amend this in Administration/Progress progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you hit a marker (Solicitor instructed) the date can be set against a property, this will then allow you to view this property within the dashboard on left side in Progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By using this system, you’ll be able to have a quick view on where the status of a property is at, plus give you a visual reminder of task that may need completing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within this option, you can also complete the chain, linking a buyers property if listed on a portal, the seller if they’re buying a property on a portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Matches ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyMatches.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Matches will show you all those contacts within Standout that either match the criteria you have placed against them but have yet to receive an email (Live matches). If you have a busy branch and suspect other members of staff have entered a contact that would match this property, Reload live matches will scan your contacts and list accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously matched will show all those contacts that have previously received an email regarding this property. There is also a reset button, this is used when for example, your property has been reduced in price and you wish to re-email all those contacts, this will enable you to this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Interested parties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Propparties.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Interested parties are for those contacts that have an interest in a property at either Sale Agreed / SSTC but then the sale falls though, you will then be able to contact them regarding the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exchange solicitor details ==&lt;br /&gt;
Add additional information to the exchange invoice here, these details will be added to the exchange invoice to the solicitors when created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Staff viewings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is to display all the staff viewings that have been undertaken for the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No viewings&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SV1.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Viewings&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SV2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When there are viewings, the information returned will be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date / Time of visit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Staff member who undertook the visit reason for the visit – when clicking this, it will open a new tab and display the diary / appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== History ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropHist.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
History is a log of all the changes and important milestones so you can view what has happened with a property. Particularly useful to see when issues occur such as a Let property is suddenly Available, allowing you to investigate further.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== More actions ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropMoreActions.png|none|thumb|500x500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom right of the screen, are the More actions and Save property tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We’d always recommend pressing “Save property” prior to moving from tab to tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where applicable, two buttons will be shown to the left of More actions. These are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the stage of a property, the options for More actions will change accordingly, plus options change between Contracts (For Sale/To Let).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book valuation                                     Book a valuation appointment with a Vendor/Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reset valuation                                   Reset a valuation confirmed status back to Pre Valuation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reset to Let                                         If you reset a Let property back to Available, reset the status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book viewing                                       Book a viewing of this property, this will bring a search box for the interested party and then take you to the diary to then book the appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task                                       create a task against this property for yourself or another member of staff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clone                                                   Clone a property (eg: Sale and/or Let)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Confirm / reschedule valuation          Confirm or reschedule a valuation appointment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate letter                                   Generate a Letter to the linked contacts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate brochure                             Generate a brochure for property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor report                                     Generate a report to send to the Vendor reporting on viewings/comments, price changes and website statistics&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoice                                    Send a one off invoice to the Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Register interest                                 Register interest in the property with another contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental Agreements                             Show the Rental agreements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email all tenants                                  For shared properties, the ability to email those Tenants with a current agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Show to Applicant/Buyer                    Show on screen the property to either the Applicant or Buyer&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Administration&amp;diff=632</id>
		<title>Administration</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Administration&amp;diff=632"/>
		<updated>2023-01-30T09:58:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Branch services */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Agency configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Agency Configuration.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Agency =====&lt;br /&gt;
Company logo             add to the system an image of your company logo for use within the Standout system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Year start =====&lt;br /&gt;
Financial year start     when the Agencies financial year starts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Holiday year start       when the Agencies holiday year starts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default local council   select your local council from the drop down list, you can press backspace and start typing the name to find the council name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Email server configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
To help with the initial configuration of your email server, a new option “Default Services” has been added.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email Server Configuration.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the initial settings for email services from:Gmail / Hosted Exchange by ISSL / Office 365 / Other mail provider&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above can be ignored if your IT support has given you details to populate the email server configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout Property Manager can integrate with your own Email server, this will then send all emails other than client match emails via your own mail server, client match emails will still be sent by the ISSL server as that can handle bulk mail. This will allow you to control which email server sends emails from Standout to your contacts. Either leave this option or enable it to use your own email server. Your IT team should be able to provide you with email server details for Standout to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The options are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Server Enabled                        ticked, this will allow configuration of your own Email Server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email host name                     normally the smtp address (eg smtp.yourdomain.com)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port number                           normally 465 or 587 (gmail etc is 587)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Protocol                                  Normally TLS but can be SSL or None&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Username                               Username of the account (can be an email address)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Password                                Password for the account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From name                             Text for the account (can be your Agency Name)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From address                          Email address of the account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send test email                       Send a test email using the above settings (saving the agency is not required for testing, only to save permanently)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Email branding ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to upload images for an email header and footer, change colour schemes and when sending a property match email, enter additional text at the top of the email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Status Overrides ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Override.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to override a status on your website and portals. The main reason for this override is whilst a sale goes through, and has the possibility of falling though, allowing the agency to continue gathering potential customer details during the sale process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Privacy ==&lt;br /&gt;
Configure the amount of time to keep details on the system. This screen allows you to determine how long you will keep various forms of data. This decision is yours and any periods should be updated in line with your privacy policy and company terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Telephone privacy statement ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This statement will be displayed alongside a telephone consent checkbox on contact details, allowing it to be read out&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recently introduced, by default, “Force GDPR conformation” has been added to Standout. This option will force the Marketing/Privacy/Manual consent option to be displayed when a member of staff adds a new contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An agency should place their own Telephone privacy statement in the above box. This will be displayed each time a staff member creates a new contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, if you are entering a Solicitor, you can instruct your staff member to ignore this option and move left to the Contact details tab and enter the Solicitor details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Data retention limits ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Vendors ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Buyer ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landlords ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tenants ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Staff ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Marketing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== MailChimp Key ====&lt;br /&gt;
To allow you to email multiple contacts, the Marketing tab allows you to link Standout to MailChimp. All the details required are linked from this page to MailChimp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== MailChimp Lists ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of how lists are shown can be seen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== File storage ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:File Storage.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section will require you to subscribe to either FTP File Server, Dropbox or Google Drive for the storage of documents. These documents are used in both Letter and Email templates to send agency documents to your contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ISSL can offer 2Gb of free disk space, please contact us at support@issl.co.uk and we can set this up for you. Once you get to the limit, we offer cheaper rates than the other services.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum size of each file you can upload is 10Mb. The maximum space is dictated by your storage provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please be aware, large files connected to an email may stop the contact from receiving your email if their email provider has a limit on the size of an email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Invoices – currently unavailable ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout is linked to our accounting system, all invoices that have been issued to your agency can be viewed from this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tawk to API ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tawk To.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can show and link the Tawk To chat system so that if installed on your website, you can receive notifications that a client wishes to chat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you log into Tawk to then choose the icon on the left side which reads “Add ons”, choose Webhooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the “+Create Webhook” button and you will then need to copy the link given in the Tawk to settings and place it into “Your Request Endpoint URL” and then copy and paste the Secret Key into the Tawk To Settings, click Save to update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note:&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to amend each staff member and go to Permissions and tick the Permission “Use Tawk.To Interface” for them to be able to use Tawk to within Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
== Branches ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default the first Branch created is called Head Office (you can rename this). When in trial or Landlord mode, only one branch can be configured. Once signed up, an agency can add further branches.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Branch List.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new branch, the procedure is identical to the details in Edit Branch,.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit Branch ===&lt;br /&gt;
To edit a branch, just click the Edit Branch on the right hand side.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit Branch Button.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact Information ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch Name              the name of this Branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Postcode                     the postcode of this branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Address                       the full address of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Country                       the country where the branch resides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Telephone Number    the telephone number of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fax Number                the fax number of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email address              the main email used for this branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Latitude                       the Latitude of this branch (for digital maps)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Longitude                    the Longitude of this branch (for digital maps)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set map                      move your branch latitude/longitude if does not display correctly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Comp. Reg. No.          the Company Registration Number for your agency/branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Legal entity name       the Legal entity name of this Agency&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you’ve added all the staff in your Agency, you can assign those Staff members to Manager roles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Default rooms ====&lt;br /&gt;
To optimise property entry, it Is possible to create default rooms and floors. These rooms/floors will appear (if chosen to be added) at the end of your floors/rooms within a property. One of the popular options for default rooms is to add Agent Notes and Disclaimers to a property and saves the re-entering of room information. Additionally, as with floors/rooms in a property, these can be excluded from being included in a brochure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Branch services =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch on hold           if you either close a branch or temporarily stop operating from a branch, this will place that branch on hold so no properties can be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales                            this branch caters for Sale properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rentals                        this branch caters for Rental properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Auction                       this branch caters for Auction properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Residential                  this branch caters for Residential classes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial                 this branch caters for Commercial classes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business sales             this branch caters for Business sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Applicable countries =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select which countries this branch deals with &amp;#039;England&amp;#039; is selected by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Default local council =====&lt;br /&gt;
This dropdown selection will default to the default local council in the Agency settings. However, if this branch does not fall within this remit, you can then choose an alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Properties =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property status mode this allows all properties to either operate by Free or Guided (default) modes. In Free mode, you select the Property status as you progress through either the Sale or Rental. In Guided mode, the system will allow you to only choose from a chosen set of statuses and will change as you progress through the Sale or Rental process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Countries can be configured so that if you only operate in England, then you can choose Not displayed otherwise you can choose Displayed or Mandatory that a country is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable EPC is when you either wish to enter an EPC for a property but, if this is not an requirement, then EPCs can be turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Force money laundering checks will only allow you to proceed with a property only when those parties have supplied money laundering documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flag properties that have not been viewing in the past number of days allows you to set a number of days so that agents are aware of properties that are not gaining interest by potential buyers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Diary =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should you wish to ensure that by default emails are sent to viewers, owners and tenants but can be either turned off here or when creating an appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Fees =====&lt;br /&gt;
Default fee                              the fee default amount (1% default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default fee type                      either Fixed or Percentage (% default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default rental fee                   the rental fee default amount (0% default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default rental fee type           either Fixed or Percentage (% default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default finders fee                  a monetary figure (£0.00 default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply fees                               when the agencies management feeds should be applied&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           On due date                when the due date occurs, fees are raised automatically&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           On payment                when the tenant pays, then the fees are raised&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Currency =====&lt;br /&gt;
An agency can set up all the agency fees that they accept, by default GBP/EUR/USD&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Letters =====&lt;br /&gt;
When letters are produced, who letters are sent from, either the Property Manager, Branch Manager or that user that is logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Language =====&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can convert text to French/German/Spanish instead of English &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tax ====&lt;br /&gt;
When you enter your VAT number, Standout will allow you to enter the VAT rate and the effective Date, this will allow the system to calculate the correct VAT amount for each applicable transaction. If the rate changes, then Standout will use the current VAT rate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Rental ====&lt;br /&gt;
Rental fee information           the agencies legal information regarding rental properties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will be displayed on your website and to portals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repairs                                    If your website was created by ISSL recently, it may have the ability for tenants to report repairs directly. If this is available and enabled, the below staff member will be notified whenever a new repair is reported by a tenant, in addition to it appearing in the list of repairs for their property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SMS ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to send SMS text messages to mobile numbers but, an Agency must purchase credits for this to operate. You will be required to enter an SMS sender number (usually your office number) and a tag line for the end of your message. Also, if enabled, Standout can text those contacts who are viewing a property, will receive a reminder 2 hours prior to an appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Advertising board request ====&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has two methods for board companies, either the standard email service, or Agency Express&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Agency Express =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Agency Express.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
When you sign up with agency express you can obtain an API code from them, just put that (Copy and Paste) into the Agency Express API field, you will also get a Branch Code, again copy and paste that into the Branch code field and select the other options as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Standard Email Board Company ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Board Company.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Board company contact details =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in the required information primarily the board company email address where the automated emails will be sent to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sale statuses&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When standout sends/updates a board company regarding changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Letting statuses =====&lt;br /&gt;
When standout sends/updates a board company regarding changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Board removal =====&lt;br /&gt;
When a board should be removed (after x days).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Applicable countries ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Applicable Countries.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
By default England is selected for all companies and offices, however you should ensure that this is selected correctly according to the countries that you sell properties in, just tick or untick as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Affiliates ===&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can send the appropriate information to either Brief Your Market or Move with Us should you have a subscription with either of these companies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Proactive Actions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Proactive actions have been created to automate actions to improve efficiency of your agency. By setting up actions you are able to initiate reminders, communications with a property vendor or landlord without having to manually perform this. For example, you might want to send an email to a vendor after 7 days of their property going on the market to reassure them you&amp;#039;re doing everything to find a buyer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Creating a new action&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - A description of the action (max 255 characters)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Enable/Disable&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If this task is Disabled, it will not be processed by Standout (if you want to suspend this for the time being)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Property Class&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Residential/Commercial/Business&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Choose which class of property to perform the action against&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Property Type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales/Lettings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Choose if this action is to perform against a sales property or a rental property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Property Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;At status change/After status change&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - &amp;quot;At status change&amp;quot; will be processed every time a property is edited and those actions which are applicable, will be processed. &amp;quot;After status change&amp;quot; will be processed by a daily job that will run in the early hours of a morning. Therefore, when selecting a &amp;quot;Contact day&amp;quot; you will NOT be able to choose &amp;quot;Immediately&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Specific status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Which status do you want to perform the action against&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contact Method&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6 methods are currently available: &amp;#039;Create a task&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Diarise telephone call&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Diarise send email&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Diarise send SMS&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Email (automated)&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Email (staff member)&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;SMS (automated)&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contact day&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to perform this action immediately or up to 28 days in the future. Note: Immediately will NOT be available if &amp;quot;After status change&amp;quot; is chosen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contact time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose a specific time for the diary appointment to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Staff member&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose who to assign any the action to (be it an task/appointment or a signature on an email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Send to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose who to send the email or SMS to - Vendor/Landlord or Buyer/Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Task name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a meaningful task subject line when creating a task for a staff member (max 255 characters)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Subject&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an email method is chosen, this appears for you to complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Body&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main text to an email. Variables can also be used and are:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Current variables are&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Property variables&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{RE} - The Display Address for the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{REF} - The property reference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{ADDRESS} - The properties full address (seperate lines)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendor variables&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorSalutation} - The vendor name including Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorTitle} - The title of the vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorName} - The first name(s) of the vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorSurname} - The surname of the vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorTelephone} - The vendors telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorMobile} - The vendors mobile telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorEmail} - The vendors email address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Landlord Variables&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordSalutation} - The landlords name including Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordTitle} - The title of the landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordName} - The first name(s) of the landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordSurname} - The surname of the landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordTelephone} - The landlords telelphone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordMobile} - The landlords mobile number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordEmail} - The landlords email address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Buyer variables&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerSalutation} - The buyer name including Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerTitle} - The title of the buyer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerName} - The first name(s) of the buyer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerSurname} - The surname of the buyer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerTelephone} - The buyers telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerMobile} - The buyers mobile telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerEmail} - The tenants email address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tenant variables&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantSalutation} - The tenant name including Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantTitle} - The title of the tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantName} - The first name(s) of the tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantSurname} - The surname of the tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantTelephone} - The tenants telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantMobile} - The tenants mobile telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantEmail} - The tenants email address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Staff variables&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{StaffMember} - The name of the staff member dealing with this property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{AgencyName} - The agency name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{OfficeAddres} - The address of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{OfficeTelephone} - The telephone number of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{OfficeEmail} - The email address of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Formatting variables&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{b} - Start to bold text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{/b} - End of the bold text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{u} - Start to underline text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{/u} - End of the underline text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{i} - Start to italic text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{/i} - End of the italic text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Delete action&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - allows for you to delete the action&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cancel&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - cancel editing the action&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Create/Update action&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - creates or updates the action&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once saved, you will be shown a list of existing actions. You have the options to edit or delete an action.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Money laundering provider ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 options for money laundering provider either none (you will do all the checks manually yourself) or [https://www.landmark.co.uk/landmark-estate-agency-services Landmark] where they will do all the checking for you.[[File:Money Laundering Provider.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If None is selected you have two options available Force money laundering checks, which basically reminds you if you have not entered any identity check information and email chase up, enabling this option will send reminder emails to those contacts that are still required to provide you with Money Laundering documentation. By enabling this option, a staff member is required to be selected and if required, the email can be amended to your own wording.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landmark AML ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Landmark Configuration.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting Landmark will enable the fully automated Anti Money Laundering verification system from [https://www.landmark.co.uk/landmark-estate-agency-services Landmark].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you sign up with Landmark tell them you are using Standout Property Manager From ISSL they will provide you with an Account ID, copy and past that into the Account ID field and save, from that point on your are able to automatically AML check contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
== Staff ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Staff List.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
By default the staff list shows all staff that are enabled, you can change this list to show all inactive staff by clicking on the filter by status drop down, from here you can select active or inactive staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should you want to restore a staff member that you have made inactive  swap to the inactive list, then click restore to the right of the person that you want to make active again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Restore User.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important that if a member of staff leaves you deactivate them from the system as soon as they walk out the door for the protection of your data, as they can login from anywhere unless you have ip restrictions in place.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add / Edit a member of staff ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Staff Screen 1.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Most fields here are self explanatory please remember if you have multiple offices to assign the staff member to the correct office with the correct privileges .Once completed  data entry of this tab, please press Create staff before moving to the next tab to ensure that there will be no data loss or entry errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Permissions ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Permissions 1.png|none|thumb|1131x1131px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Permissions 2.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Permissions 3.png|none|thumb|575x575px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can allow or disallow staff access to parts of the Standout system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The permissions screen is split into logical sections to help you assign the correct level of access to each person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you click any of the above options, they will automatically update, therefore, you do not need to click Save staff on this tab once you have completed your edits.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Email Preferences ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this section to create an email signature for automated emails as you are legally obliged to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Email access ===&lt;br /&gt;
Entering a staff’s email settings allows Standout Property Manager to automatically process emails from portals such as Rightmove and Zoopla, as well as keep a history of communication with known clients.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== History ===&lt;br /&gt;
Shows a history of what a staff member has had logged whilst using Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Login locations ===&lt;br /&gt;
When staff log in, their IP address is recorded, if a member of staff is working out of the office and shouldn’t be, this will allow you to block the address in Agency / Security.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Staff Holidays Administration Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configuring holidays is simple, there are the following two options in Administration/Staff/Staff member. Then, select the Permissions tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifically, these are the two settings that need to be configured, with ticks, that member of staff can do both, without those, are required to request holidays.&lt;br /&gt;
===Configuration Warning===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no one has “Approve own holidays” in a branch, when a staff member attempts to Request a holiday, they will see this error:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To fix this issue ensure the above has been configured.&lt;br /&gt;
===Staff Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
Within Staff details / Basic details, there is now the ability to store the staff members holiday allocation, this is in number of days.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Along with their allocation, please enter their workdays so the system knows which days they work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Teams ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Teams.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The above example screen shot shows the general team selected and all staff members are added to that team.&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the General team is created and all staff members automatically get added to this team when they are created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit a team click Edit then add or remove staff as required and click Save team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new team, enter the Team name, choose Staff and click Save team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Feeds ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Feeds.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page allows you to send data to various outbound data feeds to portals etc, and update the details for those you are subscribed to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editing Feeds ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of outbound data feed :-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standard Feeds (Rightmove, On the Market, Zoopla etc) and None Standard feeds none standard feeds need extra information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All feeds are edited by simply clicking on the Edit button as per the below example :-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Net House Prices.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Edit link is pressed it expands down to show the below :-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Net House Prices 2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just fill in the feed codes supplied by the portal company in the spaces provided, note you may have different codes for each type of property, also some types may not appear ie if you do not do commercial property then that option will not be available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Automatically include new listings determines if any new property you enter is automatically sent to the portal, if not selected you need to manually enable the property to send on the advertising tab within each property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have input the code supplied, press Save Details and you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The feed will automatically start. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second type of feed requiring more information is shown below, again the portal will supply the extra information.[[File:FTP Feeds.png|none|thumb|999x999px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Portal companies will supply you with their feed information, certain portals will require FTP details to be entered, others will already contain FTP settings, some using real time data feeds (Rightmove, Zoopla etc) do not need this information. Some portals will also have separate feed codes for each branch so ensure you check that the feeds are set up correctly as per the portal requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All portals will have feed codes for the types of properties that will be required to populate the above fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Security ==&lt;br /&gt;
This page allows you to define known IP addresses to restrict logins to this system. If no IP Addresses are listed, staff can log in from any machine. Adding IP Addresses to this list will restrict where staff can log in from, and increase the security of your data.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Security.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The above screenshot shows that Carl Smit is only allowed to access Standout Property Manager from the ip address shown, this restricting this person to only login from the office (or any known location)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IP formatting:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPV4 addresses follow the format N.N.N.N where N is a number from 1-255&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPV6 addresses follow the example 2001:0db8:0a0b:12f0:0000:0000:0000:0001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Property features ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Features.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to add new items that have not been defined in the “Features” list within Properties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example if you sell properties that quite often have canal at the rear of the garden then you could add a feature of &amp;#039;Canal Mooring&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Property Progression ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add marker ==&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to add a progression marker that does not already exist and for a range of contracts/classes and contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Residential Sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Residential Lettings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Commercial Sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Commercial Lettings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Business Sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contact Sources ==&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has some default advertising sources configured. However, should you wish to record a specific advertising campaign or advertising outlet not listed, it can be added in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Brochure Templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
By default, Standout has two brochures available. However, these can be amended for your agency. ISSL offer a service to create a brochure for your agency (at a cost), otherwise, you may download a template, amend it and upload it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new brochure, click Duplicate on either of the above defaults.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editing a brochure ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document name                     a meaning full short description of the brochure&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document description            a full description of the brochure&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a complete list of what variables to use within your brochure, click “Template variables available to use on this brochure” and a comprehensive list and descriptions will be show. If needed, copy/paste this information into a new Word document to either save as a reference and/or print out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Download Microsoft Word template” to download and edit the document. When completed, click on Choose File, select the template that you’ve edited and then click&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save Brochure. The original brochure will now be replaced with the new version. To test, open a property, click More Actions then Generate Brochure, if you then save the property with a generated brochure, Standout will create a PDF version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Letter templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout offers a master set of letters when communicating with contacts. Every letter can be duplicated, amended and then used by Staff. We recommend letter names that are meaningful and not ambiguous, especially if duplicate letters are created with only minor differences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you’ve attached Agency files to be sent with your letters, the number of letters attached will be shown in the letter description “(and has ‘x’ agency file(s) attached)”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Master letters are available to preview and Duplicate but not Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose a letter to that you wish to duplicate and click “Duplicate”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit letter ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Copy settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a document already configured (with Page/Header/Footer settings, you can use this option to copy these. Click Copy settings from, select your letter and then click Copy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a meaningful Letter name and description for this letter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
These settings allow you to control the margins on the page and the default font size to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Header ====&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to configure where a logo will appear an on what page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Footer ====&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to configure where a logo will appear an on what page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Letter content ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you configure the content of the letter and place the variables in your letter which will be converted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Design Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the “Help on designing letter templates” a list of sections and variables should be displayed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above is broken into three sections - Section variables, Mandatory variables, Optional variables (usually added variables).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Agency files ===&lt;br /&gt;
Once files have been uploaded in the Agency files section, you are able to then choose files to be sent with these letters, should you choose the Email option and are attached automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once completed click on Save letter to save these changes and return to the Letters list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Email templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with Letters, emails have Master copies that you are unable to edit, to make your own version, click “Duplicate” to create a new document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editing Email ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on Edit on the right hand side to open the template details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document name                     the name of the email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document description            a detailed description of the email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Template Code                       the wording of your email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Show merge fields&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Agency files                             the files that can be attached to an email sent from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delete                                     Delete this template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cancel                                     Cancel any alterations and return to the email templates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save email                               Save the email and return to the email templates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Diary categories ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to create new categories for the diary and also allows the category colour to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Match location updater ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Match Location Update.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The section allows you to enter an area, then, if you believe it should be altered, you can then send a request to our support team for it to be inspected and either authorised or rejected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Proposing a new location ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Propose New Location.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Nearby location          if the location can’t be found, enter one that is nearby as a starting point and then amend as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name your location    Name the location of the area you are suggesting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Propose location         click this button to send the location to support for their review.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Landmark Agency Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Landmark should provide you with four configuration keys, these are to be stored in Administration / Branch / Money laundering configuration&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Landmark Agency Configuration.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to input the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
API or Ocp Apim Subscription Key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Account ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once entered (or copy/pasted), then save the branch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to log out and log back into Standout for these settings to allow AML checking.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Administration&amp;diff=631</id>
		<title>Administration</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Administration&amp;diff=631"/>
		<updated>2023-01-30T09:58:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Default rooms */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Agency configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Agency Configuration.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Agency =====&lt;br /&gt;
Company logo             add to the system an image of your company logo for use within the Standout system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Year start =====&lt;br /&gt;
Financial year start     when the Agencies financial year starts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Holiday year start       when the Agencies holiday year starts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default local council   select your local council from the drop down list, you can press backspace and start typing the name to find the council name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Email server configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
To help with the initial configuration of your email server, a new option “Default Services” has been added.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email Server Configuration.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the initial settings for email services from:Gmail / Hosted Exchange by ISSL / Office 365 / Other mail provider&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above can be ignored if your IT support has given you details to populate the email server configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout Property Manager can integrate with your own Email server, this will then send all emails other than client match emails via your own mail server, client match emails will still be sent by the ISSL server as that can handle bulk mail. This will allow you to control which email server sends emails from Standout to your contacts. Either leave this option or enable it to use your own email server. Your IT team should be able to provide you with email server details for Standout to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The options are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Server Enabled                        ticked, this will allow configuration of your own Email Server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email host name                     normally the smtp address (eg smtp.yourdomain.com)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port number                           normally 465 or 587 (gmail etc is 587)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Protocol                                  Normally TLS but can be SSL or None&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Username                               Username of the account (can be an email address)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Password                                Password for the account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From name                             Text for the account (can be your Agency Name)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From address                          Email address of the account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send test email                       Send a test email using the above settings (saving the agency is not required for testing, only to save permanently)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Email branding ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to upload images for an email header and footer, change colour schemes and when sending a property match email, enter additional text at the top of the email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Status Overrides ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Override.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to override a status on your website and portals. The main reason for this override is whilst a sale goes through, and has the possibility of falling though, allowing the agency to continue gathering potential customer details during the sale process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Privacy ==&lt;br /&gt;
Configure the amount of time to keep details on the system. This screen allows you to determine how long you will keep various forms of data. This decision is yours and any periods should be updated in line with your privacy policy and company terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Telephone privacy statement ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This statement will be displayed alongside a telephone consent checkbox on contact details, allowing it to be read out&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recently introduced, by default, “Force GDPR conformation” has been added to Standout. This option will force the Marketing/Privacy/Manual consent option to be displayed when a member of staff adds a new contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An agency should place their own Telephone privacy statement in the above box. This will be displayed each time a staff member creates a new contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, if you are entering a Solicitor, you can instruct your staff member to ignore this option and move left to the Contact details tab and enter the Solicitor details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Data retention limits ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Vendors ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Buyer ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landlords ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tenants ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Staff ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Marketing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== MailChimp Key ====&lt;br /&gt;
To allow you to email multiple contacts, the Marketing tab allows you to link Standout to MailChimp. All the details required are linked from this page to MailChimp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== MailChimp Lists ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of how lists are shown can be seen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== File storage ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:File Storage.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section will require you to subscribe to either FTP File Server, Dropbox or Google Drive for the storage of documents. These documents are used in both Letter and Email templates to send agency documents to your contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ISSL can offer 2Gb of free disk space, please contact us at support@issl.co.uk and we can set this up for you. Once you get to the limit, we offer cheaper rates than the other services.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum size of each file you can upload is 10Mb. The maximum space is dictated by your storage provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please be aware, large files connected to an email may stop the contact from receiving your email if their email provider has a limit on the size of an email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Invoices – currently unavailable ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout is linked to our accounting system, all invoices that have been issued to your agency can be viewed from this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tawk to API ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tawk To.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can show and link the Tawk To chat system so that if installed on your website, you can receive notifications that a client wishes to chat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you log into Tawk to then choose the icon on the left side which reads “Add ons”, choose Webhooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the “+Create Webhook” button and you will then need to copy the link given in the Tawk to settings and place it into “Your Request Endpoint URL” and then copy and paste the Secret Key into the Tawk To Settings, click Save to update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note:&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to amend each staff member and go to Permissions and tick the Permission “Use Tawk.To Interface” for them to be able to use Tawk to within Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
== Branches ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default the first Branch created is called Head Office (you can rename this). When in trial or Landlord mode, only one branch can be configured. Once signed up, an agency can add further branches.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Branch List.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new branch, the procedure is identical to the details in Edit Branch,.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit Branch ===&lt;br /&gt;
To edit a branch, just click the Edit Branch on the right hand side.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit Branch Button.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact Information ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch Name              the name of this Branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Postcode                     the postcode of this branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Address                       the full address of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Country                       the country where the branch resides&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Telephone Number    the telephone number of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fax Number                the fax number of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Email address              the main email used for this branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Latitude                       the Latitude of this branch (for digital maps)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Longitude                    the Longitude of this branch (for digital maps)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set map                      move your branch latitude/longitude if does not display correctly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Comp. Reg. No.          the Company Registration Number for your agency/branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Legal entity name       the Legal entity name of this Agency&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Managers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you’ve added all the staff in your Agency, you can assign those Staff members to Manager roles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Default rooms ====&lt;br /&gt;
To optimise property entry, it Is possible to create default rooms and floors. These rooms/floors will appear (if chosen to be added) at the end of your floors/rooms within a property. One of the popular options for default rooms is to add Agent Notes and Disclaimers to a property and saves the re-entering of room information. Additionally, as with floors/rooms in a property, these can be excluded from being included in a brochure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Branch services =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch on hold           if you either close a branch or temporarily stop operating from a branch, this will place that branch on hold so no properties can be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales                            this branch caters for Sale properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rentals                        this branch caters for Rental properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Auction                       this branch caters for Auction properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Residential                  this branch caters for Residential classes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commercial                 this branch caters for Commercial classes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Business sales             this branch caters for Business sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Applicable countries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select which countries this branch deals with &amp;#039;England&amp;#039; is selected by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Default local council =====&lt;br /&gt;
This dropdown selection will default to the default local council in the Agency settings. However, if this branch does not fall within this remit, you can then choose an alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Properties =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property status mode this allows all properties to either operate by Free or Guided (default) modes. In Free mode, you select the Property status as you progress through either the Sale or Rental. In Guided mode, the system will allow you to only choose from a chosen set of statuses and will change as you progress through the Sale or Rental process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Countries can be configured so that if you only operate in England, then you can choose Not displayed otherwise you can choose Displayed or Mandatory that a country is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable EPC is when you either wish to enter an EPC for a property but, if this is not an requirement, then EPCs can be turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Force money laundering checks will only allow you to proceed with a property only when those parties have supplied money laundering documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flag properties that have not been viewing in the past number of days allows you to set a number of days so that agents are aware of properties that are not gaining interest by potential buyers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Diary =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should you wish to ensure that by default emails are sent to viewers, owners and tenants but can be either turned off here or when creating an appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Fees =====&lt;br /&gt;
Default fee                              the fee default amount (1% default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default fee type                      either Fixed or Percentage (% default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default rental fee                   the rental fee default amount (0% default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default rental fee type           either Fixed or Percentage (% default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default finders fee                  a monetary figure (£0.00 default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply fees                               when the agencies management feeds should be applied&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           On due date                when the due date occurs, fees are raised automatically&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           On payment                when the tenant pays, then the fees are raised&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Currency =====&lt;br /&gt;
An agency can set up all the agency fees that they accept, by default GBP/EUR/USD&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Letters =====&lt;br /&gt;
When letters are produced, who letters are sent from, either the Property Manager, Branch Manager or that user that is logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Language =====&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can convert text to French/German/Spanish instead of English &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tax ====&lt;br /&gt;
When you enter your VAT number, Standout will allow you to enter the VAT rate and the effective Date, this will allow the system to calculate the correct VAT amount for each applicable transaction. If the rate changes, then Standout will use the current VAT rate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Rental ====&lt;br /&gt;
Rental fee information           the agencies legal information regarding rental properties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will be displayed on your website and to portals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repairs                                    If your website was created by ISSL recently, it may have the ability for tenants to report repairs directly. If this is available and enabled, the below staff member will be notified whenever a new repair is reported by a tenant, in addition to it appearing in the list of repairs for their property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SMS ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to send SMS text messages to mobile numbers but, an Agency must purchase credits for this to operate. You will be required to enter an SMS sender number (usually your office number) and a tag line for the end of your message. Also, if enabled, Standout can text those contacts who are viewing a property, will receive a reminder 2 hours prior to an appointment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Advertising board request ====&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has two methods for board companies, either the standard email service, or Agency Express&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Agency Express =====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Agency Express.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
When you sign up with agency express you can obtain an API code from them, just put that (Copy and Paste) into the Agency Express API field, you will also get a Branch Code, again copy and paste that into the Branch code field and select the other options as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Standard Email Board Company ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Board Company.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Board company contact details =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in the required information primarily the board company email address where the automated emails will be sent to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sale statuses&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When standout sends/updates a board company regarding changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Letting statuses =====&lt;br /&gt;
When standout sends/updates a board company regarding changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Board removal =====&lt;br /&gt;
When a board should be removed (after x days).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Applicable countries ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Applicable Countries.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
By default England is selected for all companies and offices, however you should ensure that this is selected correctly according to the countries that you sell properties in, just tick or untick as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Affiliates ===&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can send the appropriate information to either Brief Your Market or Move with Us should you have a subscription with either of these companies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Proactive Actions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Proactive actions have been created to automate actions to improve efficiency of your agency. By setting up actions you are able to initiate reminders, communications with a property vendor or landlord without having to manually perform this. For example, you might want to send an email to a vendor after 7 days of their property going on the market to reassure them you&amp;#039;re doing everything to find a buyer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Creating a new action&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - A description of the action (max 255 characters)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Enable/Disable&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If this task is Disabled, it will not be processed by Standout (if you want to suspend this for the time being)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Property Class&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Residential/Commercial/Business&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Choose which class of property to perform the action against&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Property Type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales/Lettings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Choose if this action is to perform against a sales property or a rental property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Property Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;At status change/After status change&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - &amp;quot;At status change&amp;quot; will be processed every time a property is edited and those actions which are applicable, will be processed. &amp;quot;After status change&amp;quot; will be processed by a daily job that will run in the early hours of a morning. Therefore, when selecting a &amp;quot;Contact day&amp;quot; you will NOT be able to choose &amp;quot;Immediately&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Specific status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Which status do you want to perform the action against&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contact Method&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6 methods are currently available: &amp;#039;Create a task&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Diarise telephone call&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Diarise send email&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Diarise send SMS&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Email (automated)&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;Email (staff member)&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;SMS (automated)&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contact day&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to perform this action immediately or up to 28 days in the future. Note: Immediately will NOT be available if &amp;quot;After status change&amp;quot; is chosen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contact time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose a specific time for the diary appointment to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Staff member&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose who to assign any the action to (be it an task/appointment or a signature on an email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Send to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose who to send the email or SMS to - Vendor/Landlord or Buyer/Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Task name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a meaningful task subject line when creating a task for a staff member (max 255 characters)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Subject&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an email method is chosen, this appears for you to complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Body&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main text to an email. Variables can also be used and are:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Current variables are&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Property variables&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{RE} - The Display Address for the property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{REF} - The property reference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{ADDRESS} - The properties full address (seperate lines)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendor variables&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorSalutation} - The vendor name including Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorTitle} - The title of the vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorName} - The first name(s) of the vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorSurname} - The surname of the vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorTelephone} - The vendors telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorMobile} - The vendors mobile telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{VendorEmail} - The vendors email address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Landlord Variables&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordSalutation} - The landlords name including Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordTitle} - The title of the landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordName} - The first name(s) of the landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordSurname} - The surname of the landlord&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordTelephone} - The landlords telelphone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordMobile} - The landlords mobile number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{LandlordEmail} - The landlords email address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Buyer variables&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerSalutation} - The buyer name including Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerTitle} - The title of the buyer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerName} - The first name(s) of the buyer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerSurname} - The surname of the buyer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerTelephone} - The buyers telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerMobile} - The buyers mobile telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{BuyerEmail} - The tenants email address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tenant variables&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantSalutation} - The tenant name including Title&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantTitle} - The title of the tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantName} - The first name(s) of the tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantSurname} - The surname of the tenant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantTelephone} - The tenants telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantMobile} - The tenants mobile telephone number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TenantEmail} - The tenants email address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Staff variables&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{StaffMember} - The name of the staff member dealing with this property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{AgencyName} - The agency name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{OfficeAddres} - The address of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{OfficeTelephone} - The telephone number of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{OfficeEmail} - The email address of the branch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Formatting variables&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{b} - Start to bold text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{/b} - End of the bold text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{u} - Start to underline text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{/u} - End of the underline text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{i} - Start to italic text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{/i} - End of the italic text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Delete action&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - allows for you to delete the action&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cancel&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - cancel editing the action&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Create/Update action&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - creates or updates the action&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once saved, you will be shown a list of existing actions. You have the options to edit or delete an action.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Money laundering provider ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 options for money laundering provider either none (you will do all the checks manually yourself) or [https://www.landmark.co.uk/landmark-estate-agency-services Landmark] where they will do all the checking for you.[[File:Money Laundering Provider.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If None is selected you have two options available Force money laundering checks, which basically reminds you if you have not entered any identity check information and email chase up, enabling this option will send reminder emails to those contacts that are still required to provide you with Money Laundering documentation. By enabling this option, a staff member is required to be selected and if required, the email can be amended to your own wording.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landmark AML ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Landmark Configuration.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting Landmark will enable the fully automated Anti Money Laundering verification system from [https://www.landmark.co.uk/landmark-estate-agency-services Landmark].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you sign up with Landmark tell them you are using Standout Property Manager From ISSL they will provide you with an Account ID, copy and past that into the Account ID field and save, from that point on your are able to automatically AML check contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
== Staff ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Staff List.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
By default the staff list shows all staff that are enabled, you can change this list to show all inactive staff by clicking on the filter by status drop down, from here you can select active or inactive staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should you want to restore a staff member that you have made inactive  swap to the inactive list, then click restore to the right of the person that you want to make active again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Restore User.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important that if a member of staff leaves you deactivate them from the system as soon as they walk out the door for the protection of your data, as they can login from anywhere unless you have ip restrictions in place.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add / Edit a member of staff ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Staff Screen 1.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Most fields here are self explanatory please remember if you have multiple offices to assign the staff member to the correct office with the correct privileges .Once completed  data entry of this tab, please press Create staff before moving to the next tab to ensure that there will be no data loss or entry errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Permissions ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Permissions 1.png|none|thumb|1131x1131px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Permissions 2.png|none|thumb|300x300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Permissions 3.png|none|thumb|575x575px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can allow or disallow staff access to parts of the Standout system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The permissions screen is split into logical sections to help you assign the correct level of access to each person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you click any of the above options, they will automatically update, therefore, you do not need to click Save staff on this tab once you have completed your edits.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Email Preferences ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this section to create an email signature for automated emails as you are legally obliged to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Email access ===&lt;br /&gt;
Entering a staff’s email settings allows Standout Property Manager to automatically process emails from portals such as Rightmove and Zoopla, as well as keep a history of communication with known clients.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== History ===&lt;br /&gt;
Shows a history of what a staff member has had logged whilst using Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Login locations ===&lt;br /&gt;
When staff log in, their IP address is recorded, if a member of staff is working out of the office and shouldn’t be, this will allow you to block the address in Agency / Security.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Staff Holidays Administration Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configuring holidays is simple, there are the following two options in Administration/Staff/Staff member. Then, select the Permissions tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifically, these are the two settings that need to be configured, with ticks, that member of staff can do both, without those, are required to request holidays.&lt;br /&gt;
===Configuration Warning===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no one has “Approve own holidays” in a branch, when a staff member attempts to Request a holiday, they will see this error:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To fix this issue ensure the above has been configured.&lt;br /&gt;
===Staff Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
Within Staff details / Basic details, there is now the ability to store the staff members holiday allocation, this is in number of days.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Along with their allocation, please enter their workdays so the system knows which days they work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Teams ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Teams.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The above example screen shot shows the general team selected and all staff members are added to that team.&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the General team is created and all staff members automatically get added to this team when they are created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit a team click Edit then add or remove staff as required and click Save team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new team, enter the Team name, choose Staff and click Save team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Feeds ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Feeds.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page allows you to send data to various outbound data feeds to portals etc, and update the details for those you are subscribed to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editing Feeds ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of outbound data feed :-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standard Feeds (Rightmove, On the Market, Zoopla etc) and None Standard feeds none standard feeds need extra information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All feeds are edited by simply clicking on the Edit button as per the below example :-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Net House Prices.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Edit link is pressed it expands down to show the below :-&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Net House Prices 2.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just fill in the feed codes supplied by the portal company in the spaces provided, note you may have different codes for each type of property, also some types may not appear ie if you do not do commercial property then that option will not be available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Automatically include new listings determines if any new property you enter is automatically sent to the portal, if not selected you need to manually enable the property to send on the advertising tab within each property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have input the code supplied, press Save Details and you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The feed will automatically start. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second type of feed requiring more information is shown below, again the portal will supply the extra information.[[File:FTP Feeds.png|none|thumb|999x999px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Portal companies will supply you with their feed information, certain portals will require FTP details to be entered, others will already contain FTP settings, some using real time data feeds (Rightmove, Zoopla etc) do not need this information. Some portals will also have separate feed codes for each branch so ensure you check that the feeds are set up correctly as per the portal requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All portals will have feed codes for the types of properties that will be required to populate the above fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Security ==&lt;br /&gt;
This page allows you to define known IP addresses to restrict logins to this system. If no IP Addresses are listed, staff can log in from any machine. Adding IP Addresses to this list will restrict where staff can log in from, and increase the security of your data.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Security.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The above screenshot shows that Carl Smit is only allowed to access Standout Property Manager from the ip address shown, this restricting this person to only login from the office (or any known location)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IP formatting:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPV4 addresses follow the format N.N.N.N where N is a number from 1-255&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPV6 addresses follow the example 2001:0db8:0a0b:12f0:0000:0000:0000:0001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Property features ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Property Features.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to add new items that have not been defined in the “Features” list within Properties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example if you sell properties that quite often have canal at the rear of the garden then you could add a feature of &amp;#039;Canal Mooring&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Property Progression ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add marker ==&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to add a progression marker that does not already exist and for a range of contracts/classes and contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Residential Sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Residential Lettings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Commercial Sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Commercial Lettings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default Business Sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contact Sources ==&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has some default advertising sources configured. However, should you wish to record a specific advertising campaign or advertising outlet not listed, it can be added in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Brochure Templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
By default, Standout has two brochures available. However, these can be amended for your agency. ISSL offer a service to create a brochure for your agency (at a cost), otherwise, you may download a template, amend it and upload it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new brochure, click Duplicate on either of the above defaults.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editing a brochure ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document name                     a meaning full short description of the brochure&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document description            a full description of the brochure&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a complete list of what variables to use within your brochure, click “Template variables available to use on this brochure” and a comprehensive list and descriptions will be show. If needed, copy/paste this information into a new Word document to either save as a reference and/or print out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Download Microsoft Word template” to download and edit the document. When completed, click on Choose File, select the template that you’ve edited and then click&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save Brochure. The original brochure will now be replaced with the new version. To test, open a property, click More Actions then Generate Brochure, if you then save the property with a generated brochure, Standout will create a PDF version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Letter templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout offers a master set of letters when communicating with contacts. Every letter can be duplicated, amended and then used by Staff. We recommend letter names that are meaningful and not ambiguous, especially if duplicate letters are created with only minor differences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you’ve attached Agency files to be sent with your letters, the number of letters attached will be shown in the letter description “(and has ‘x’ agency file(s) attached)”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Master letters are available to preview and Duplicate but not Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose a letter to that you wish to duplicate and click “Duplicate”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit letter ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Copy settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a document already configured (with Page/Header/Footer settings, you can use this option to copy these. Click Copy settings from, select your letter and then click Copy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a meaningful Letter name and description for this letter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
These settings allow you to control the margins on the page and the default font size to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Header ====&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to configure where a logo will appear an on what page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Footer ====&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to configure where a logo will appear an on what page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Letter content ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you configure the content of the letter and place the variables in your letter which will be converted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Design Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the “Help on designing letter templates” a list of sections and variables should be displayed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above is broken into three sections - Section variables, Mandatory variables, Optional variables (usually added variables).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Agency files ===&lt;br /&gt;
Once files have been uploaded in the Agency files section, you are able to then choose files to be sent with these letters, should you choose the Email option and are attached automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once completed click on Save letter to save these changes and return to the Letters list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Email templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with Letters, emails have Master copies that you are unable to edit, to make your own version, click “Duplicate” to create a new document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editing Email ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on Edit on the right hand side to open the template details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document name                     the name of the email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document description            a detailed description of the email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Template Code                       the wording of your email&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Show merge fields&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Agency files                             the files that can be attached to an email sent from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delete                                     Delete this template&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cancel                                     Cancel any alterations and return to the email templates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save email                               Save the email and return to the email templates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Diary categories ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to create new categories for the diary and also allows the category colour to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Match location updater ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Match Location Update.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The section allows you to enter an area, then, if you believe it should be altered, you can then send a request to our support team for it to be inspected and either authorised or rejected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Proposing a new location ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Propose New Location.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Nearby location          if the location can’t be found, enter one that is nearby as a starting point and then amend as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name your location    Name the location of the area you are suggesting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Propose location         click this button to send the location to support for their review.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Landmark Agency Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Landmark should provide you with four configuration keys, these are to be stored in Administration / Branch / Money laundering configuration&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Landmark Agency Configuration.png|none|thumb|1200x1200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to input the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
API or Ocp Apim Subscription Key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Account ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once entered (or copy/pasted), then save the branch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will need to log out and log back into Standout for these settings to allow AML checking.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview&amp;diff=630</id>
		<title>Contacts Overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview&amp;diff=630"/>
		<updated>2022-08-19T13:33:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Solicitor Address Details */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Contacts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a contact, the more information entered does help you in providing a better service to your clients.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within Standout Property Manager the contact system is used for all types of contact, those being :-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Applicant / Tenant / Purchaser / Vendor / Landlord / Solicitor / Contractor / Rental guarantor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contact can also be more than one type, ie one contact can be a vendor and a landlord if selling a property and also a landlord of another property so there is no need to enter the same person more than once, and Standout Property Manager does try to guard against this. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on which type of contact you are working on, you will see tabs appear and disappear as appropriate. Our recommendation is that once you’ve completed a section, click Save Contact. When creating a new contact, you only need to complete the first screen, click Create contact and continue editing the contact details. The default tabs when creating a new contact are:&lt;br /&gt;
= Contact Details =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a new contact ==&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a new contact you will be faced with the form below, just fill in the fields required (items marked with an asterisk are mandatory)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must also select they type of contact at this stage.[[File:Adding A New Contact.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic details ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic details really are the bear minimum requirements for any contact, note if the contact is a solicitor or contractor then company name will also be shown here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Basic Details.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact type ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Type.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contact MUST have at least one option selected:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!Contact Type&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Applicant / Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to buy or rent a property.&lt;br /&gt;
|Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear&lt;br /&gt;
Extra options will appear allowing the entry of Date of Birth, National insurance number and Nationality&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Purchaser&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to buy a property&lt;br /&gt;
|Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to market their property with you&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to rent out their property with you&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|A Solicitor that one of your contacts is using&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Contractor&lt;br /&gt;
|A contractor that undertakes repairs&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
If Contractor is selected then additional options appear to allow the type of contractor to be selected, if a contractor does more than one type select as many as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note. A contractor company name is mandatory, if the contractor is a sole trader then enter the person name as the company name.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note. The contractor name must be unique if using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contractor types.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact information ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how you want to communicate with the contact, store phone numbers and email address in this section.[[File:Contact Information.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A note one email address&amp;#039;s all contacts must have a unique email address  – this cannot be used on multiple contact’s, you can enter multiple email addresses in this field. Separate each email with a comma&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                               Example - me@me.com, you@you.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Heat Rating ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field has been added to contact screens for Applicants and Purchasers, allowing you to assign &amp;#039;heat&amp;#039;.   Think of an old fashioned Hot Box&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This could be for any reason - such as a cash buyer - and allows these contacts to be identified during a search and listed independently on the new &amp;#039;Hot Contact&amp;#039; page. You can rate a contact from 0 – 10 They will have this number displayed on their contact in the List from a search in Yellow to Red dependent on how hot they were rated.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Heat Rating.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Address ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic Address Details ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Basic Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above is the standard entry for all contact except for Solicitors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Company Name                      should your contact represent a company of any description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Postcode                                 by entering a Postcode, the system will attempt to find and populate the address automatically dependant on the results returned&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Address                                   allows you to amend and format the address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Country                                   allows you to select the require country (default is defined in administration for your office)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Solicitor Address Details ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Solicitor Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Solicitors in Standout are a special type of contact as you can have many solicitors working for a company, and to ensure data consistency we ensure that the company name is only listed once at a post code (you can have the same company in many towns so we limit to only one company name at the same address).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You then add each solicitor person to the main solicitor record by entering their name etc on the contact, then in the company name search box enter the correct company name and press search, it will then populate the address if the company name already exists. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As long as your policy for data entry is consistent, by typing a Solicitors company name the system will return their details to save both duplicate data and maintain a consistent format, this will then populate the Solicitor’s address (this should also reduce data inputting)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note. Solicitor company names must be unique when using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other information is then entered as the above section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Staff notes and information ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Staff Notes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are confidential notes that are only available to staff regarding the contact, also, allowing one member of the branch to assign this contact to another member of staff should the one responsible for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Anti Money Laundering =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The government has strict rules in place to ensure that no person is using illicit funds as a way to launder money. Our notice gives links to the official websites for further help and information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two options within Standout for recording Money Laundering. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first is to manually store Identification documents, for the contact(s) and for the property they reside at. You can obtain their documents, photocopy and store in a secure place and also record information in this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second is to subscribe to Landmark AML Money Laundering service. Using Landmark, you send information from within Standout to their system. Within five minutes (usually), you are sent back a report and details of whether a person has passed or failed the check. It is important to note, this service charges for each check, it is imperative that you send over the correct information, in the correct format to ensure the best match possible. In the main contact details, you must enter roughly how long they have resided at the property address. Optional information would be their N.I. number or Driving License number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current ID details ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have received and copied money laundering documentation, this section will show what has been recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Documents listed by default are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Address&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           A recent original mortgage statement from a recognised lender&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           A recent utility bill or statement (do not accept mobile telephone bills)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Bank, building society or credit union statement or passbook containing current address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Benefit book or original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Confirmation from an electoral register search that a person lives at that address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current UK driving licence (old full licence or new photo card licence) if not used for evidence of name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           EEA member state identity card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           House or motor insurance certificate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Inland Revenue self-assessment statement or tax demand&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Local council or housing association rent card or tenancy agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Local council tax bill for the current year&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Record of home visit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Person&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Benefit book original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefits&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Cheque drawn on an account in the name of the client with a UK bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current full UK driving licence (new style only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current Passport&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current UK or EEA photo-card driving licence&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           EE member state identity card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Firearms or shotgun certificates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           National identity card containing photograph of the client&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Photographic registration cards for self-employed individuals and partnerships in the construction industry CIS4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Residence permit issued by the Home Office to EEA nationals on sigh of own country passport&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Identification reference (required)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the identification reference of the document being presented&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date Produced and photocopied (required)&lt;br /&gt;
Date on ID (required)&lt;br /&gt;
Copy held        if you have photocopied the document, tick this&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Right to rent ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Right To Rent.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your agencies statement regarding Right to rent details and the laws that the agency abides by.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Requirements =&lt;br /&gt;
The system is fully automated and will automatically email the contact with details of any matching properties once you save the match requirement, and also whenever a property is created or edit in such a way that that property now matches the requirements of the selected contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Match requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
The requirements tab allows you to create match reqiurements for both applicants looking to rent a property and purchasers looking to buy a property. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start creating a match requirement click the Create new requirements button as shown below.[[File:Contact Match Requirements.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can have multiple match requirements for each contact, it is advisable to use a meaningful unique name for each of the requirements. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just fill out the required information as shown below based on the contacts requirements, once complete click on the Save requirements button&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New requirement.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An explanation of each field is given below :-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Match name               a unique name for this requirement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Match area                 enter a postcode, town and the system will return matching areas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Distance                      How wide a distance from the match area is the client looking at&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New build only            if they are interested in new build only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contract type              For Sale / To Let&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property type              Any type / Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property style             Barn conversion / Chalet / Cottage / Detached / Detached Dormer / Detached Villa / End Terraced / Farm / Link Detached / Semi-Detached Villa / Shared / Sheltered Housing / Town / Undefined / Villa / Village&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minimum bedrooms   how many bedrooms (if specified)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minimum price           starting price a client is looking for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maximum price           a maximum price a client is looking at&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required features       as you start typing a feature or choose from the list available&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Live matches ==&lt;br /&gt;
The live matches tab is a great way to see instantly which properties (if any) match the contacts requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Previously matched ==&lt;br /&gt;
When an email has been sent to the contact with a list of matching proerties you can see here which proerties have been sent in each email, you can also see if the contact has opened the email to view the properties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If required you can also resend the emal to that contact, this is useful if the email got lost in the wonderful world of the internet, or the contact has changed email address&amp;#039;s ( change the email address on the main contact details tab first, before resending)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Files =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Files.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to store files with any Contact (similar to the way we do with properties) by default we store these files in a container on our servers known as the FTP system, as an alternate to this we can also integrate into Dropbox or Google Drive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This allows additional storage for files that are associated with your client and properties. To configure this, please choose Administration / File storage&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Notes =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to store notes against both Contacts and Properties. Including storing Sticky Notes. Additionally, if you have configured File Storage then you’ll be able to add one file per Note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Viewings / Offers =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Viewings can be arranged in multiple places, within a contact, the Diary and a property. This section will list all the properties this client has seen with any offers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Rental agreements =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a contact is either a Landlord, Tenant or a Rental guarantor, this section will show all those agreements that have been linked. When you click on the View option to see further details regarding the tenancy, including all transactions. You will be able to either choose the default transactions, or choose from the date ranges, once you have updated the transaction list, click the Tenant Statement button to create a statement to send to the tenant, either by downloading, printing and posting or by emailing it directly to the tenant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Communications =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can be linked to an SMS hosting service where an agent may buy credits, then from Communications you can text your contact (a mobile number will have to be input into the correct field). Also, from here an email can be sent to the contact and all communications are listed in the history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Marketing / Privacy =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mailchimp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to subscribe this contact to any email marketing lists that have been linked to Standout Property Manager. You can link additional lists in the Agency tab of Admin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Please note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: It can take up to 10 minutes between pressing the subscribe button and Mailchimp showing the new subscriptions. Contacts may unsubscribe themselves from a list for any reason. If a contact has unsubscribed from a particular list, Standout Property Manager will not resubscribe them, regardless of the status of the Subscribed checkbox. Use of MailChimp implies acceptance of their Terms of Use - particularly Section 20. Compliance with Laws.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== GDPR consent ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Administration section you can enter your Marketing and Policy statement. When speaking with a client, this option allows you to read your agencies policy and once a client agrees, the agent can tick the Consent given option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of November 2020, when “Force GDPR conformation” is enabled, when entering a new contact, your staff member will be shown the above. Unless they are entering a solicitor, they must read your statement or the system generated message to your contact prior to entering the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= History =&lt;br /&gt;
The history shows significant events that have occurred with agents editing/saving and communicating.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful when multiple people are editing the same data, so that you can see who has been editing a contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= My Properties =&lt;br /&gt;
The section allows you to assign properties that a contact owns or is purchasing to assign an individual solicitor to each property. Rather than only allowing a single solicitor to a contact (as we previously set up), this can now be configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Linked properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Linked Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A new report has now been added, next to “Edit Property”, if a property is For Sale, then you can click “Vendor report” to display a report showing the property details, owner(s), viewings/feedback, website statistics and any price changes. This report can be downloaded as a PDF, emailed to the owners or printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Purchasing Properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Purchasing Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Quick Searching Solicitors ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you build up your list of Solicitors within Standout, to search by just scrolling up and down can be quite time consuming and frustrating.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whenever you see a dropdown list throughout the whole of Standout, and especially one that contains many options (councils/solicitors etc), a quick way to search is to do the following&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick Search Sols.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll notice a flashing cursor at the right hand of the screen (highlighted above).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the backspace and you can then enter your search criteria&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick Search Sols1.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then select the chosen solicitor from the list of results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Invoices =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout now has the ability to invoice Vendors from their properties. When editing the contact, you can then perform these options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark as Paid&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Print invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delete – You CANNOT delete an invoice that is marked as paid&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Solicitors – Solicitor details =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Solicitor DX.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only when a contact is a solicitor will this tab appear and allows you to store a Solicitors DX number and DX town. Additionally, this area will list all those contacts that this Solicitor is associated with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= More actions =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The More actions sub menu for contacts offers three options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create appointment&lt;br /&gt;
This option creates an appointment in the diary for a staff member and this contact, also, email them the appointment and include the Notes written in the email. By default, Email Contact will be enabled in the Appointment form, this uses an email template located in Administration/Emails and is named &amp;quot;Contact appointment&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task&lt;br /&gt;
create a task for yourself or another member of staff against this contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book a viewing&lt;br /&gt;
create a booking for the client to see a property&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;diff=629</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Sidebar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;diff=629"/>
		<updated>2022-04-22T07:20:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Welcome&lt;br /&gt;
** Standout - Quick Start|Quick Start&lt;br /&gt;
** Marketing_a_Property|Market a Property&lt;br /&gt;
* General Operation&lt;br /&gt;
** The_Dashboard|Dashboard&lt;br /&gt;
** Profile_Configuration|Staff Profile&lt;br /&gt;
** Staff_Holidays|Staff Holidays&lt;br /&gt;
* Diary&lt;br /&gt;
** Diary_Overview|Diary Overview&lt;br /&gt;
** Task_List|Task List&lt;br /&gt;
* Properties&lt;br /&gt;
** Property Overview|Property Overview&lt;br /&gt;
** Adding_a_new_Rental_Property|Adding a new rental property&lt;br /&gt;
** Rental_Property_Overview|Rental Overview&lt;br /&gt;
** Rental_HMO|HMO Rentals&lt;br /&gt;
** Bulk_Rental_Payments|Bulk Payments&lt;br /&gt;
** Landmark_Anti_Money_Laundering_Checking|Landmark AML&lt;br /&gt;
** Staff_visits|Staff Visits&lt;br /&gt;
* Business Sales&lt;br /&gt;
** Business_Sales|Business Sales Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* Contacts&lt;br /&gt;
** Contacts Overview|Contacts&lt;br /&gt;
** Tenant_List|Tenant List&lt;br /&gt;
** Chase_Outstanding_Rent|Chase Outstanding Rent&lt;br /&gt;
** GDPR|GDPR&lt;br /&gt;
* Reports&lt;br /&gt;
** Overview|Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* Administration&lt;br /&gt;
** Administration|Administration&lt;br /&gt;
** Brochure_Printing_Templates|Brochure Templates&lt;br /&gt;
** Agency_Express|Agency Express&lt;br /&gt;
** Xero_Accounts_Setup|Xero Accounts Setup&lt;br /&gt;
** Xero_Accounts_Usage|Xero Accounts Usage&lt;br /&gt;
** Sage_Accounts_Setup|Sage Accounts Setup&lt;br /&gt;
** Sage_Accounts_Usage|Sage Accounts Usage&lt;br /&gt;
* System&lt;br /&gt;
** recentchanges-url|recentchanges&lt;br /&gt;
* SEARCH&lt;br /&gt;
* LANGUAGES&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=628</id>
		<title>Sage Accounts Usage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=628"/>
		<updated>2022-04-22T07:19:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Payments */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts synchronisation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required entries have been created on the Xero accounts setup screen for the branch you will have a new tab in administration &amp;quot;Accounts synchronisation&amp;quot; click on this tab to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Branch selection ======&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).[[File:Administration Accounts Sync Tab.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Sage prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Sage email address, password and be successful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Data synchronisation ======&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what is required to synchronise, Standout will display these buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Synchronise Contacts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send all contacts that have either been created or amended since the last synchronisation. You cannot have duplicate contacts (Contacts Name or Company Names) in Sage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Synchronise rental invoices ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All rental invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. If a contact does not exist on Sage, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Synchronise sales invoices ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All sales invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. Again, if a contact does not exist on Sage, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Payments ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find any invoice that has been either partially or fully allocated in Sage, enter the Start date, End date or choose date ranges from the Date Helpers. Once you’ve chosen your date range, click the Search Sage button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout will search for payments in Sage and once located, will update the invoice details within Standout. An email will be sent detailing which invoices have been synchronised.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=627</id>
		<title>Sage Accounts Usage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=627"/>
		<updated>2022-04-22T07:18:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Accounts synchronisation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts synchronisation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required entries have been created on the Xero accounts setup screen for the branch you will have a new tab in administration &amp;quot;Accounts synchronisation&amp;quot; click on this tab to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Branch selection ======&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).[[File:Administration Accounts Sync Tab.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Sage prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Sage email address, password and be successful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Data synchronisation ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what is required to synchronise, Standout will display these buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Synchronise Contacts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send all contacts that have either been created or amended since the last synchronisation. You cannot have duplicate contacts (Contacts Name or Company Names) in Sage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Synchronise rental invoices ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All rental invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. If a contact does not exist on Sage, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Synchronise sales invoices ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All sales invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. Again, if a contact does not exist on Sage, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Payments ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           To find any invoice that has been either partially or fully allocated in Sage, enter the&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start date, End date or choose date ranges from the Date Helpers. Once you’ve chosen your date range, click the Search Sage button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout will search for payments in Sage and once located, will update the invoice details within Standout. An email will be sent detailing which invoices have been synchronised.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=626</id>
		<title>Sage Accounts Usage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=626"/>
		<updated>2022-04-22T07:16:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: Created page with &amp;quot;===== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts synchronisation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ===== Once the required entries have been created on the Xero accounts setup screen for the branch you will have a new tab in administrati...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts synchronisation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required entries have been created on the Xero accounts setup screen for the branch you will have a new tab in administration &amp;quot;Accounts synchronisation&amp;quot; click on this tab to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Branch selection ======&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).[[File:Administration Accounts Sync Tab.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Xero prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Xero Login screen.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Xero email address, password and be successful. Xero will prompt you to choose the required company to integrate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Data synchronisation ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what is required to synchronise, Standout will display these buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise Contacts ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send all contacts that have either been created or amended since the last synchronisation. You cannot have duplicate contacts (Contacts Name or Company Names) in Xero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise rental invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All rental invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. If a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise sales invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All sales invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. Again, if a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=625</id>
		<title>Sage Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=625"/>
		<updated>2022-04-22T07:16:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Configuring Xero for Standout Integration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Sage for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Sage needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Other Income &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Sage Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Sage for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Sage App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Sage (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts link&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Sage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Sage Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Sage Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send invoices from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rental chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=624</id>
		<title>Sage Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Sage_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=624"/>
		<updated>2022-04-22T07:13:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: Created page with &amp;quot;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration == Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration  ==== Chart of Accounts ====   In your chart of accounts, w...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Other Income &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts link&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Webhooks Key&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send invoices from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Contact Start Date&lt;br /&gt;
|Send contacts from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rental chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=615</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=615"/>
		<updated>2022-03-21T09:08:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Branch configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Other Income &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts link&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Webhooks Key&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send invoices from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Contact Start Date&lt;br /&gt;
|Send contacts from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rental chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=614</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=614"/>
		<updated>2022-03-21T08:37:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Branch configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Other Income &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts link&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Webhooks Key&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Sync Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send contacts and invoices from the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rental chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview&amp;diff=613</id>
		<title>Contacts Overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Contacts_Overview&amp;diff=613"/>
		<updated>2022-03-10T09:30:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Solicitor Address Details */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Contacts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a contact, the more information entered does help you in providing a better service to your clients.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within Standout Property Manager the contact system is used for all types of contact, those being :-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Applicant / Tenant / Purchaser / Vendor / Landlord / Solicitor / Contractor / Rental guarantor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contact can also be more than one type, ie one contact can be a vendor and a landlord if selling a property and also a landlord of another property so there is no need to enter the same person more than once, and Standout Property Manager does try to guard against this. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on which type of contact you are working on, you will see tabs appear and disappear as appropriate. Our recommendation is that once you’ve completed a section, click Save Contact. When creating a new contact, you only need to complete the first screen, click Create contact and continue editing the contact details. The default tabs when creating a new contact are:&lt;br /&gt;
= Contact Details =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a new contact ==&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a new contact you will be faced with the form below, just fill in the fields required (items marked with an asterisk are mandatory)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must also select they type of contact at this stage.[[File:Adding A New Contact.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic details ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The basic details really are the bear minimum requirements for any contact, note if the contact is a solicitor or contractor then company name will also be shown here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Basic Details.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact type ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Type.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A contact MUST have at least one option selected:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!Contact Type&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Applicant / Tenant&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to buy or rent a property.&lt;br /&gt;
|Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear&lt;br /&gt;
Extra options will appear allowing the entry of Date of Birth, National insurance number and Nationality&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Purchaser&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to buy a property&lt;br /&gt;
|Tab ‘Marketing’ will appear&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to market their property with you&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord&lt;br /&gt;
|Someone looking to rent out their property with you&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|A Solicitor that one of your contacts is using&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Contractor&lt;br /&gt;
|A contractor that undertakes repairs&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
If Contractor is selected then additional options appear to allow the type of contractor to be selected, if a contractor does more than one type select as many as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note. A contractor company name is mandatory, if the contractor is a sole trader then enter the person name as the company name.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note. The contractor name must be unique if using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contractor types.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contact information ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how you want to communicate with the contact, store phone numbers and email address in this section.[[File:Contact Information.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A note one email address&amp;#039;s all contacts must have a unique email address  – this cannot be used on multiple contact’s, you can enter multiple email addresses in this field. Separate each email with a comma&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                               Example - me@me.com, you@you.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Heat Rating ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field has been added to contact screens for Applicants and Purchasers, allowing you to assign &amp;#039;heat&amp;#039;.   Think of an old fashioned Hot Box&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This could be for any reason - such as a cash buyer - and allows these contacts to be identified during a search and listed independently on the new &amp;#039;Hot Contact&amp;#039; page. You can rate a contact from 0 – 10 They will have this number displayed on their contact in the List from a search in Yellow to Red dependent on how hot they were rated.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Heat Rating.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Address ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Basic Address Details ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Basic Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above is the standard entry for all contact except for Solicitors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Company Name                      should your contact represent a company of any description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Postcode                                 by entering a Postcode, the system will attempt to find and populate the address automatically dependant on the results returned&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Address                                   allows you to amend and format the address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Country                                   allows you to select the require country (default is defined in administration for your office)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Solicitor Address Details ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Solicitor Address.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
As long as your policy for data entry is consistent, by typing a Solicitors company name the system will return their details to save both duplicate data and maintain a consistent format, this will then populate the Solicitor’s address (this should also reduce data inputting)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note. Solicitor company names must be unique when using Xero as an accounting system linked to Standout.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All other information is then entered as the above section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Staff notes and information ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Staff Notes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are confidential notes that are only available to staff regarding the contact, also, allowing one member of the branch to assign this contact to another member of staff should the one responsible for this contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Anti Money Laundering =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The government has strict rules in place to ensure that no person is using illicit funds as a way to launder money. Our notice gives links to the official websites for further help and information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two options within Standout for recording Money Laundering. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first is to manually store Identification documents, for the contact(s) and for the property they reside at. You can obtain their documents, photocopy and store in a secure place and also record information in this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second is to subscribe to Landmark AML Money Laundering service. Using Landmark, you send information from within Standout to their system. Within five minutes (usually), you are sent back a report and details of whether a person has passed or failed the check. It is important to note, this service charges for each check, it is imperative that you send over the correct information, in the correct format to ensure the best match possible. In the main contact details, you must enter roughly how long they have resided at the property address. Optional information would be their N.I. number or Driving License number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current ID details ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have received and copied money laundering documentation, this section will show what has been recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Documents listed by default are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Address&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           A recent original mortgage statement from a recognised lender&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           A recent utility bill or statement (do not accept mobile telephone bills)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Bank, building society or credit union statement or passbook containing current address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Benefit book or original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Confirmation from an electoral register search that a person lives at that address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current UK driving licence (old full licence or new photo card licence) if not used for evidence of name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           EEA member state identity card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           House or motor insurance certificate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Inland Revenue self-assessment statement or tax demand&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Local council or housing association rent card or tenancy agreement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Local council tax bill for the current year&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Record of home visit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Person&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Benefit book original notification letter from the Benefits Agency confirming the rights to benefits&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Cheque drawn on an account in the name of the client with a UK bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current full UK driving licence (new style only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current Passport&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Current UK or EEA photo-card driving licence&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           EE member state identity card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Firearms or shotgun certificates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           National identity card containing photograph of the client&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Photographic registration cards for self-employed individuals and partnerships in the construction industry CIS4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Residence permit issued by the Home Office to EEA nationals on sigh of own country passport&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
           Identification reference (required)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the identification reference of the document being presented&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date Produced and photocopied (required)&lt;br /&gt;
Date on ID (required)&lt;br /&gt;
Copy held        if you have photocopied the document, tick this&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Right to rent ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Right To Rent.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your agencies statement regarding Right to rent details and the laws that the agency abides by.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Requirements =&lt;br /&gt;
The system is fully automated and will automatically email the contact with details of any matching properties once you save the match requirement, and also whenever a property is created or edit in such a way that that property now matches the requirements of the selected contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Match requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
The requirements tab allows you to create match reqiurements for both applicants looking to rent a property and purchasers looking to buy a property. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start creating a match requirement click the Create new requirements button as shown below.[[File:Contact Match Requirements.png|none|thumb|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can have multiple match requirements for each contact, it is advisable to use a meaningful unique name for each of the requirements. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just fill out the required information as shown below based on the contacts requirements, once complete click on the Save requirements button&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New requirement.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An explanation of each field is given below :-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Match name               a unique name for this requirement&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Match area                 enter a postcode, town and the system will return matching areas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Distance                      How wide a distance from the match area is the client looking at&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New build only            if they are interested in new build only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class                            Residential / Commercial / Business&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contract type              For Sale / To Let&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property type              Any type / Bungalow / Character Property / Flat/Apartment / House / Land&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Property style             Barn conversion / Chalet / Cottage / Detached / Detached Dormer / Detached Villa / End Terraced / Farm / Link Detached / Semi-Detached Villa / Shared / Sheltered Housing / Town / Undefined / Villa / Village&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minimum bedrooms   how many bedrooms (if specified)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minimum price           starting price a client is looking for&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maximum price           a maximum price a client is looking at&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required features       as you start typing a feature or choose from the list available&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Live matches ==&lt;br /&gt;
The live matches tab is a great way to see instantly which properties (if any) match the contacts requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Previously matched ==&lt;br /&gt;
When an email has been sent to the contact with a list of matching proerties you can see here which proerties have been sent in each email, you can also see if the contact has opened the email to view the properties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If required you can also resend the emal to that contact, this is useful if the email got lost in the wonderful world of the internet, or the contact has changed email address&amp;#039;s ( change the email address on the main contact details tab first, before resending)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Files =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contact Files.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to store files with any Contact (similar to the way we do with properties) by default we store these files in a container on our servers known as the FTP system, as an alternate to this we can also integrate into Dropbox or Google Drive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This allows additional storage for files that are associated with your client and properties. To configure this, please choose Administration / File storage&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Notes =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PropertyNotes.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout has the ability to store notes against both Contacts and Properties. Including storing Sticky Notes. Additionally, if you have configured File Storage then you’ll be able to add one file per Note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Viewings / Offers =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Viewings can be arranged in multiple places, within a contact, the Diary and a property. This section will list all the properties this client has seen with any offers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Rental agreements =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a contact is either a Landlord, Tenant or a Rental guarantor, this section will show all those agreements that have been linked. When you click on the View option to see further details regarding the tenancy, including all transactions. You will be able to either choose the default transactions, or choose from the date ranges, once you have updated the transaction list, click the Tenant Statement button to create a statement to send to the tenant, either by downloading, printing and posting or by emailing it directly to the tenant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Communications =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout can be linked to an SMS hosting service where an agent may buy credits, then from Communications you can text your contact (a mobile number will have to be input into the correct field). Also, from here an email can be sent to the contact and all communications are listed in the history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Marketing / Privacy =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mailchimp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to subscribe this contact to any email marketing lists that have been linked to Standout Property Manager. You can link additional lists in the Agency tab of Admin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Please note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: It can take up to 10 minutes between pressing the subscribe button and Mailchimp showing the new subscriptions. Contacts may unsubscribe themselves from a list for any reason. If a contact has unsubscribed from a particular list, Standout Property Manager will not resubscribe them, regardless of the status of the Subscribed checkbox. Use of MailChimp implies acceptance of their Terms of Use - particularly Section 20. Compliance with Laws.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== GDPR consent ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Administration section you can enter your Marketing and Policy statement. When speaking with a client, this option allows you to read your agencies policy and once a client agrees, the agent can tick the Consent given option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of November 2020, when “Force GDPR conformation” is enabled, when entering a new contact, your staff member will be shown the above. Unless they are entering a solicitor, they must read your statement or the system generated message to your contact prior to entering the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= History =&lt;br /&gt;
The history shows significant events that have occurred with agents editing/saving and communicating.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful when multiple people are editing the same data, so that you can see who has been editing a contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= My Properties =&lt;br /&gt;
The section allows you to assign properties that a contact owns or is purchasing to assign an individual solicitor to each property. Rather than only allowing a single solicitor to a contact (as we previously set up), this can now be configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Linked properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Linked Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A new report has now been added, next to “Edit Property”, if a property is For Sale, then you can click “Vendor report” to display a report showing the property details, owner(s), viewings/feedback, website statistics and any price changes. This report can be downloaded as a PDF, emailed to the owners or printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Purchasing Properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Purchasing Properties.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Once you select the chosen solicitor, Save the contact to assign that solicitor. Their contacts details will then be displayed below, allowing you to open their details in a new tab, or, email them directly from Standout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: If you change the solicitor, you MUST save the contact for the new solicitor details to be configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Quick Searching Solicitors ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you build up your list of Solicitors within Standout, to search by just scrolling up and down can be quite time consuming and frustrating.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whenever you see a dropdown list throughout the whole of Standout, and especially one that contains many options (councils/solicitors etc), a quick way to search is to do the following&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick Search Sols.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll notice a flashing cursor at the right hand of the screen (highlighted above).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the backspace and you can then enter your search criteria&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick Search Sols1.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then select the chosen solicitor from the list of results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Invoices =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout now has the ability to invoice Vendors from their properties. When editing the contact, you can then perform these options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark as Paid&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Print invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delete – You CANNOT delete an invoice that is marked as paid&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Solicitors – Solicitor details =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Solicitor DX.png|none|thumb|1300x1300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only when a contact is a solicitor will this tab appear and allows you to store a Solicitors DX number and DX town. Additionally, this area will list all those contacts that this Solicitor is associated with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= More actions =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The More actions sub menu for contacts offers two options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a task               create a task for yourself or another member of staff against this contact&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Book a viewing            create a booking for the client to see a property&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=612</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Usage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=612"/>
		<updated>2022-03-10T09:25:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Xero synchronisation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts synchronisation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required entries have been created on the Xero accounts setup screen for the branch you will have a new tab in administration &amp;quot;Accounts synchronisation&amp;quot; click on this tab to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Branch selection ======&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).[[File:Administration Accounts Sync Tab.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Xero prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Xero Login screen.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Xero email address, password and be successful. Xero will prompt you to choose the required company to integrate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Data synchronisation ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what is required to synchronise, Standout will display these buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise Contacts ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send all contacts that have either been created or amended since the last synchronisation. You cannot have duplicate contacts (Contacts Name or Company Names) in Xero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise rental invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All rental invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. If a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise sales invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All sales invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. Again, if a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Xero synchronisation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Xero updating Standout ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero integration has been designed to only send invoice payments to Standout and mark those as either paid in full or partially. It is recommended that if a synchronised contact requires a name and/or address update, amendments should be undertaken in Standout and then a contact synchronisation from Standout to Xero ran.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an invoice update occurs, such as entering a payment against an invoice, an update will be sent from Xero to Standout:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental invoice        ​​full and part payments will be recorded in the Financials of a Tenancy Agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales invoices        ​​part payment of an invoice will not be recorded, only when an invoice has been fully paid will it be displayed. To view these ​​​invoices, you can either choose a Contact and then Invoices or ​​​property and then Exchange invoice details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Rental payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause two updates in Standout, the removal of the payment transaction and the amendment of the actual transaction to show either None or Partial payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Sales payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause the invoice in either the Property or Contact invoice tab to shown as Unpaid, rather than paid.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=611</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Usage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=611"/>
		<updated>2022-03-10T09:23:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Branch selection */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===== Accounts synchronisation =====&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required entries have been created on the Xero accounts setup screen for the branch you will have a new tab in administration &amp;quot;Accounts synchronisation&amp;quot; click on this tab to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Branch selection ======&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).[[File:Administration Accounts Sync Tab.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Xero prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Xero Login screen.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Xero email address, password and be successful. Xero will prompt you to choose the required company to integrate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Data synchronisation ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what is required to synchronise, Standout will display these buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise Contacts ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send all contacts that have either been created or amended since the last synchronisation. You cannot have duplicate contacts (Contacts Name or Company Names) in Xero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise rental invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All rental invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. If a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise sales invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All sales invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. Again, if a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Xero synchronisation =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Xero updating Standout ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero integration has been designed to only send invoice payments to Standout and mark those as either paid in full or partially. It is recommended that if a synchronised contact requires a name and/or address update, amendments should be undertaken in Standout and then a contact synchronisation from Standout to Xero ran.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an invoice update occurs, such as entering a payment against an invoice, an update will be sent from Xero to Standout:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental invoice        ​​full and part payments will be recorded in the Financials of a Tenancy Agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales invoices        ​​part payment of an invoice will not be recorded, only when an invoice has been fully paid will it be displayed. To view these ​​​invoices, you can either choose a Contact and then Invoices or ​​​property and then Exchange invoice details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Rental payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause two updates in Standout, the removal of the payment transaction and the amendment of the actual transaction to show either None or Partial payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Sales payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause the invoice in either the Property or Contact invoice tab to shown as Unpaid, rather than paid.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=File:Xero_Login_screen.png&amp;diff=610</id>
		<title>File:Xero Login screen.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=File:Xero_Login_screen.png&amp;diff=610"/>
		<updated>2022-03-10T09:22:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Xero Login screen&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=609</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Usage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=609"/>
		<updated>2022-03-10T09:19:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Branch selection */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===== Accounts synchronisation =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Branch selection ======&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Administration Accounts Sync Tab.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Xero prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Xero email address, password and be successful. Xero will prompt you to choose the required company to integrate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Data synchronisation ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what is required to synchronise, Standout will display these buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise Contacts ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send all contacts that have either been created or amended since the last synchronisation. You cannot have duplicate contacts (Contacts Name or Company Names) in Xero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise rental invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All rental invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. If a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise sales invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All sales invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. Again, if a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Xero synchronisation =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Xero updating Standout ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero integration has been designed to only send invoice payments to Standout and mark those as either paid in full or partially. It is recommended that if a synchronised contact requires a name and/or address update, amendments should be undertaken in Standout and then a contact synchronisation from Standout to Xero ran.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an invoice update occurs, such as entering a payment against an invoice, an update will be sent from Xero to Standout:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental invoice        ​​full and part payments will be recorded in the Financials of a Tenancy Agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales invoices        ​​part payment of an invoice will not be recorded, only when an invoice has been fully paid will it be displayed. To view these ​​​invoices, you can either choose a Contact and then Invoices or ​​​property and then Exchange invoice details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Rental payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause two updates in Standout, the removal of the payment transaction and the amendment of the actual transaction to show either None or Partial payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Sales payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause the invoice in either the Property or Contact invoice tab to shown as Unpaid, rather than paid.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=File:Administration_Accounts_Sync_Tab.png&amp;diff=608</id>
		<title>File:Administration Accounts Sync Tab.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=File:Administration_Accounts_Sync_Tab.png&amp;diff=608"/>
		<updated>2022-03-10T09:18:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Administration Accounts Sync Tab&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=607</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Usage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=607"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T14:18:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===== Accounts synchronisation =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Branch selection ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Xero prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Xero email address, password and be successful. Xero will prompt you to choose the required company to integrate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Data synchronisation ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what is required to synchronise, Standout will display these buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise Contacts ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send all contacts that have either been created or amended since the last synchronisation. You cannot have duplicate contacts (Contacts Name or Company Names) in Xero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise rental invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All rental invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. If a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Synchronise sales invoices ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All sales invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. Again, if a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Xero synchronisation =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Xero updating Standout ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero integration has been designed to only send invoice payments to Standout and mark those as either paid in full or partially. It is recommended that if a synchronised contact requires a name and/or address update, amendments should be undertaken in Standout and then a contact synchronisation from Standout to Xero ran.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an invoice update occurs, such as entering a payment against an invoice, an update will be sent from Xero to Standout:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental invoice        ​​full and part payments will be recorded in the Financials of a Tenancy Agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales invoices        ​​part payment of an invoice will not be recorded, only when an invoice has been fully paid will it be displayed. To view these ​​​invoices, you can either choose a Contact and then Invoices or ​​​property and then Exchange invoice details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Rental payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause two updates in Standout, the removal of the payment transaction and the amendment of the actual transaction to show either None or Partial payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Sales payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause the invoice in either the Property or Contact invoice tab to shown as Unpaid, rather than paid.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=606</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Usage</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Usage&amp;diff=606"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T11:44:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: Created page with &amp;quot;Accounts synchronisation   Branch selection   To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).   If you have not logg...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Accounts synchronisation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch selection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Xero prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Xero email address, password and be successful. Xero will prompt you to choose the required company to integrate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data synchronisation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what is required to synchronise, Standout will display these buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Synchronise Contacts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send all contacts that have either been created or amended since the last synchronisation. You cannot have duplicate contacts (Contacts Name or Company Names) in Xero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Synchronise rental invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All rental invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. If a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Synchronise sales invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All sales invoices that have been created since the last synchronisation. Again, if a contact does not exist on Xero, an invoice cannot be synchronised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero synchronisation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero updating Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero integration has been designed to only send invoice payments to Standout and mark those as either paid in full or partially. It is recommended that if a synchronised contact requires a name and/or address update, amendments should be undertaken in Standout and then a contact synchronisation from Standout to Xero ran.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an invoice update occurs, such as entering a payment against an invoice, an update will be sent from Xero to Standout:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental invoice        ​​full and part payments will be recorded in the Financials of a Tenancy Agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales invoices        ​​part payment of an invoice will not be recorded, only when an invoice has been fully paid will it be displayed. To view these ​​​invoices, you can either choose a Contact and then Invoices or ​​​property and then Exchange invoice details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Rental payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause two updates in Standout, the removal of the payment transaction and the amendment of the actual transaction to show either None or Partial payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a Sales payment is deleted in Xero, it will cause the invoice in either the Property or Contact invoice tab to shown as Unpaid, rather than paid.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;diff=605</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Sidebar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;diff=605"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T11:42:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Welcome&lt;br /&gt;
** Standout - Quick Start|Quick Start&lt;br /&gt;
** Marketing_a_Property|Market a Property&lt;br /&gt;
* General Operation&lt;br /&gt;
** The_Dashboard|Dashboard&lt;br /&gt;
** Profile_Configuration|Staff Profile&lt;br /&gt;
** Staff_Holidays|Staff Holidays&lt;br /&gt;
* Diary&lt;br /&gt;
** Diary_Overview|Diary Overview&lt;br /&gt;
** Task_List|Task List&lt;br /&gt;
* Properties&lt;br /&gt;
** Property Overview|Property Overview&lt;br /&gt;
** Adding_a_new_Rental_Property|Adding a new rental property&lt;br /&gt;
** Rental_Property_Overview|Rental Overview&lt;br /&gt;
** Rental_HMO|HMO Rentals&lt;br /&gt;
** Bulk_Rental_Payments|Bulk Payments&lt;br /&gt;
** Landmark_Anti_Money_Laundering_Checking|Landmark AML&lt;br /&gt;
** Staff_visits|Staff Visits&lt;br /&gt;
* Business Sales&lt;br /&gt;
** Business_Sales|Business Sales Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* Contacts&lt;br /&gt;
** Contacts Overview|Contacts&lt;br /&gt;
** Tenant_List|Tenant List&lt;br /&gt;
** Chase_Outstanding_Rent|Chase Outstanding Rent&lt;br /&gt;
** GDPR|GDPR&lt;br /&gt;
* Reports&lt;br /&gt;
** Overview|Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* Administration&lt;br /&gt;
** Administration|Administration&lt;br /&gt;
** Brochure_Printing_Templates|Brochure Templates&lt;br /&gt;
** Agency_Express|Agency Express&lt;br /&gt;
** Xero_Accounts_Setup|Xero Accounts Setup&lt;br /&gt;
** Xero_Accounts_Usage|Xero Accounts Usage&lt;br /&gt;
* System&lt;br /&gt;
** recentchanges-url|recentchanges&lt;br /&gt;
* SEARCH&lt;br /&gt;
* LANGUAGES&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=604</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=604"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T11:34:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Chart of Accounts */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Other Income &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts link&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Webhooks Key&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send invoices after the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rental chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=603</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=603"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T11:29:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Branch configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts link&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Webhooks Key&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice Start Date​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Send invoices after the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rental chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=602</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=602"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T11:27:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Sales chart account codes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts link&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Webhooks Key&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Start Date​​Send invoices after the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rental chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Vendor invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Solicitor invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=601</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=601"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T11:25:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Branch configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts link&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Webhooks Key&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Start Date​​Send invoices after the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rental chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Sales chart account codes ======&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoices​​Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solicitor invoices​​Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=600</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=600"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T11:24:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Accounts link */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accounts link&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
!Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Webhooks Key&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Start Date​​Send invoices after the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rental chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Field&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Sales chart account codes ======&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoices​​Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solicitor invoices​​Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=599</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=599"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T11:23:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Accounts link */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Accounts link ======&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
!Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Webhooks Key&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Start Date​​Send invoices after the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rental chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Account Code&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
|An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Sales chart account codes ======&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoices​​Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solicitor invoices​​Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=598</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=598"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T11:22:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Rental chart account codes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Accounts link ======&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!Accounts system&lt;br /&gt;
!Xero&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Xero Webhooks Key&lt;br /&gt;
|Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Start Date​​Send invoices after the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rental chart account codes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Account Code&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Invoice number prefix&lt;br /&gt;
!An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent requests&lt;br /&gt;
|Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests​​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices&lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant changes&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against tenants for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Landlord charges&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​&lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed property&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======  Sales chart account codes ======&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoices​​Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solicitor invoices​​Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=597</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=597"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T11:16:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Configuring Standout for Xero Integration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====  Branch configuration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Accounts link ======&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts system​​Xero&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Client ID​​​Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Client Secret​​Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Webhooks Key​​Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Start Date​​Send invoices after the date entered, by default Standout will initially suggest todays’ date, overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Rental chart account codes ======&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rent requests​​​Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bond requests​​​Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repair invoices​​Repair invoices charged to landlords against their properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tenant changes​​Invoices raised against tenants for a managed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Landlord charges​​Invoices raised against landlords for their property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recurring invoices​​Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales chart account codes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoices​​Invoices raised against a vendor selling a property &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solicitor invoices​​Invoices raised against a property completion to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=596</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=596"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T11:11:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Chart of Accounts */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ Chart Of Accounts Suggestion&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Code&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Tax&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch configuration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts system​​Xero&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Client ID​​​Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Client Secret​​Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Webhooks Key​​Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Start Date​​Send invoices after the date entered, by default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout will initially suggest todays’ date,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental chart account codes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rent requests​​​Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bond requests​​​Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repair invoices​​Repair invoices charged to landlords against&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
their properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tenant changes​​Invoices raised against tenants for a managed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Landlord charges​​Invoices raised against landlords for their&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recurring invoices​​Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales chart account codes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoices​​Invoices raised against a vendor selling a &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solicitor invoices​​Invoices raised against a property completion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts synchronisation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch selection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Xero prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Xero email address, password and be successful. Xero will prompt you to choose the required company to integrate.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=595</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=595"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T11:10:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Chart of Accounts */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|+ !Type !Code !Name !Description !Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1001 &lt;br /&gt;
|Tenant Rents &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1002 &lt;br /&gt;
|Bond requests &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|No Tax &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1003 &lt;br /&gt;
|Repair invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1004 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to tenants​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1005 &lt;br /&gt;
|Charges to landlords &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1006 &lt;br /&gt;
|Recurring invoices​​​ &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1007 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Vendors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|Sales &lt;br /&gt;
|1008 &lt;br /&gt;
|Invoices to Solicitors &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|20% (VAT on income) &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch configuration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts system​​Xero&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Client ID​​​Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Client Secret​​Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Webhooks Key​​Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Start Date​​Send invoices after the date entered, by default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout will initially suggest todays’ date,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental chart account codes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rent requests​​​Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bond requests​​​Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repair invoices​​Repair invoices charged to landlords against&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
their properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tenant changes​​Invoices raised against tenants for a managed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Landlord charges​​Invoices raised against landlords for their&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recurring invoices​​Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales chart account codes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoices​​Invoices raised against a vendor selling a &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solicitor invoices​​Invoices raised against a property completion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts synchronisation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch selection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Xero prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Xero email address, password and be successful. Xero will prompt you to choose the required company to integrate.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=594</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=594"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T11:06:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Chart of Accounts */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; |+ !Type !Code !Name !Description !Tax |- |Sales |1001 |Tenant Rents | |No Tax |- |Sales |1002 |Bond requests | |No Tax |- |Sales |1003 |Repair invoices​​​ | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1004 |Charges to tenants​​​ | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1005 |Charges to landlords | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1006 |Recurring invoices​​​ | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1007 |Invoices to Vendors | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1008 |Invoices to Solicitors | |20% (VAT on income) |}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch configuration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts system​​Xero&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Client ID​​​Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Client Secret​​Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Webhooks Key​​Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Start Date​​Send invoices after the date entered, by default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout will initially suggest todays’ date,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental chart account codes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rent requests​​​Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bond requests​​​Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repair invoices​​Repair invoices charged to landlords against&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
their properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tenant changes​​Invoices raised against tenants for a managed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Landlord charges​​Invoices raised against landlords for their&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recurring invoices​​Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales chart account codes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoices​​Invoices raised against a vendor selling a &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solicitor invoices​​Invoices raised against a property completion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts synchronisation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch selection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Xero prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Xero email address, password and be successful. Xero will prompt you to choose the required company to integrate.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=593</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=593"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T11:05:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Chart of Accounts */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; |+ !Type !Code !Name !Description !Tax |- |Sales |1001 |Tenant Rents | |No Tax |- |Sales |1002 |Bond requests | |No Tax |- |Sales |1003 |Repair invoices​​​ | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1004 |Charges to tenants​​​ | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1005 |Charges to landlords | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1006 |Recurring invoices​​​ | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1007 |Invoices to Vendors | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1008 |Invoices to Solicitors | |20% (VAT on income) |}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch configuration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts system​​Xero&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Client ID​​​Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Client Secret​​Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Webhooks Key​​Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Start Date​​Send invoices after the date entered, by default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout will initially suggest todays’ date,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental chart account codes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rent requests​​​Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bond requests​​​Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repair invoices​​Repair invoices charged to landlords against&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
their properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tenant changes​​Invoices raised against tenants for a managed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Landlord charges​​Invoices raised against landlords for their&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recurring invoices​​Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales chart account codes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoices​​Invoices raised against a vendor selling a &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solicitor invoices​​Invoices raised against a property completion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts synchronisation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch selection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Xero prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Xero email address, password and be successful. Xero will prompt you to choose the required company to integrate.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=592</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=592"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T11:05:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: /* Chart of Accounts */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; |+ !Type !Code !Name !Description !Tax |- |Sales |1001 |Tenant Rents | |No Tax |- |Sales |1002 |Bond requests | |No Tax |- |Sales |1003 |Repair invoices​​​ | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1004 |Charges to tenants​​​ | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1005 |Charges to landlords | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1006 |Recurring invoices​​​ | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1007 |Invoices to Vendors | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1008 |Invoices to Solicitors | |20% (VAT on income) |}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch configuration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts system​​Xero&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Client ID​​​Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Client Secret​​Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Webhooks Key​​Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Start Date​​Send invoices after the date entered, by default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout will initially suggest todays’ date,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental chart account codes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rent requests​​​Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bond requests​​​Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repair invoices​​Repair invoices charged to landlords against&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
their properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tenant changes​​Invoices raised against tenants for a managed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Landlord charges​​Invoices raised against landlords for their&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recurring invoices​​Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales chart account codes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoices​​Invoices raised against a vendor selling a &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solicitor invoices​​Invoices raised against a property completion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts synchronisation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch selection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Xero prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Xero email address, password and be successful. Xero will prompt you to choose the required company to integrate.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=591</id>
		<title>Xero Accounts Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Xero_Accounts_Setup&amp;diff=591"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T09:25:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: Created page with &amp;quot;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration == Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration  ==== Chart of Accounts ====   In your chart of accounts, w...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Configuring Xero for Standout Integration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Xero needs to have the following definitions to provide integration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chart of Accounts ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your chart of accounts, we suggest the following are created, but if in doubt, seek advice from you accountant:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revenue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Code​​ a code of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
* Name​​ a self-explanatory name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tax Rate​ the required tax classification. {| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; |+ !Type !Code !Name !Description !Tax |- |Sales |1001 |Tenant Rents | |No Tax |- |Sales |1002 |Bond requests | |No Tax |- |Sales |1003 |Repair invoices​​​ | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1004 |Charges to tenants​​​ | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1005 |Charges to landlords | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1006 |Recurring invoices​​​ | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1007 |Invoices to Vendors | |20% (VAT on income) |- |Sales |1008 |Invoices to Solicitors | |20% (VAT on income) |}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note: If one or more of these are not configured in Standout, transfers will not occur, warnings are displayed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Configuring Standout for Xero Integration =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====== Staff configuration ======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Those staff members that require access to transfer contacts/invoices to any Accounting System, they need this permission adding to their profile. To do this, click Administration/Staff/Staff member/Edit Staff. Then, choose Permissions and place a tick (or remove if required) against “Accounting Software Link”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch configuration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout requires the following information to be entered (in Administration/Branch/Edit Branch/Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend that the following Accounts link fields are left blank when configuring Standout/Xero for the first time. By leaving these fields blank, Standout will populate each of these fields with our Xero App configuration details. Enter your own ONLY if you’ve created them within Xero (developer functions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts system​​Xero&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Client ID​​​Standout App Client ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Client Secret​​Standout App Client Secret&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Xero Webhooks Key​​Standout App Webhooks key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Start Date​​Send invoices after the date entered, by default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standout will initially suggest todays’ date,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
overwrite with an earlier date if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rental chart account codes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rent requests​​​Rent due invoices from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bond requests​​​Bond requests from Standout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repair invoices​​Repair invoices charged to landlords against&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
their properties&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tenant changes​​Invoices raised against tenants for a managed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Landlord charges​​Invoices raised against landlords for their&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property managed by an agent&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recurring invoices​​Invoices raised against a tenant for a managed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales chart account codes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice number prefix​​An identifier to make searching for invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
from Standout in Xero easier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vendor invoices​​Invoices raised against a vendor selling a &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
property&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solicitor invoices​​Invoices raised against a property completion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
to be paid by the vendors solicitor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You CANNOT use the same Invoice Number Prefix for Rentals and Sales – they MUST be unique&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We do not recommend leaving them blank so that you’re able to identify Standout documents easily&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accounts synchronisation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch selection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin the process a branch must be selected (if only one branch exists, that branch will be defaulted).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have not logged into Xero prior, you are required to click the Login to the accounts system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in, you will need to log in with your Xero email address, password and be successful. Xero will prompt you to choose the required company to integrate.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;diff=590</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Sidebar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;diff=590"/>
		<updated>2022-03-09T09:17:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Welcome&lt;br /&gt;
** Standout - Quick Start|Quick Start&lt;br /&gt;
** Marketing_a_Property|Market a Property&lt;br /&gt;
* General Operation&lt;br /&gt;
** The_Dashboard|Dashboard&lt;br /&gt;
** Profile_Configuration|Staff Profile&lt;br /&gt;
** Staff_Holidays|Staff Holidays&lt;br /&gt;
* Diary&lt;br /&gt;
** Diary_Overview|Diary Overview&lt;br /&gt;
** Task_List|Task List&lt;br /&gt;
* Properties&lt;br /&gt;
** Property Overview|Property Overview&lt;br /&gt;
** Adding_a_new_Rental_Property|Adding a new rental property&lt;br /&gt;
** Rental_Property_Overview|Rental Overview&lt;br /&gt;
** Rental_HMO|HMO Rentals&lt;br /&gt;
** Bulk_Rental_Payments|Bulk Payments&lt;br /&gt;
** Landmark_Anti_Money_Laundering_Checking|Landmark AML&lt;br /&gt;
** Staff_visits|Staff Visits&lt;br /&gt;
* Business Sales&lt;br /&gt;
** Business_Sales|Business Sales Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* Contacts&lt;br /&gt;
** Contacts Overview|Contacts&lt;br /&gt;
** Tenant_List|Tenant List&lt;br /&gt;
** Chase_Outstanding_Rent|Chase Outstanding Rent&lt;br /&gt;
** GDPR|GDPR&lt;br /&gt;
* Reports&lt;br /&gt;
** Overview|Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* Administration&lt;br /&gt;
** Administration|Administration&lt;br /&gt;
** Brochure_Printing_Templates|Brochure Templates&lt;br /&gt;
** Agency_Express|Agency Express&lt;br /&gt;
** Xero_Accounts_Setup|Xero Accounts Setup&lt;br /&gt;
* System&lt;br /&gt;
** recentchanges-url|recentchanges&lt;br /&gt;
* SEARCH&lt;br /&gt;
* LANGUAGES&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Rental_Step_Through&amp;diff=589</id>
		<title>Rental Step Through</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Rental_Step_Through&amp;diff=589"/>
		<updated>2022-02-16T13:17:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The following guid as a simple how to list, market and add a tenancy to a rental property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entering a new rental property is basically the same process as for sales :-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A landlord contacts you and asks you to market the property&lt;br /&gt;
* You will [[Contacts Overview|add the details of the landlord]] if new to you.&lt;br /&gt;
* You [[Adding a new Rental Property|create a new property listing]] within standout recording some very basic details about the property, and link the landlord to this property.&lt;br /&gt;
* You arrange a valuation visit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have visited the property and got the particulars you then enter them into Standout along with any photos etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* You normally would create a sample brochure and give to the landlord for approval.&lt;br /&gt;
* Once the landlord approves the details you can then change the property status to Available.&lt;br /&gt;
* At this point the property is sent to your web site and any portals you subscribe to.&lt;br /&gt;
* You will then get enquiries for the property, record the details into Standout if they are new to you.&lt;br /&gt;
* Arrange a viewing for the potential tenant.&lt;br /&gt;
* After the viewing has taken place you will either have an offer from the potential tenant or an agreement for the full rental value (or not interested)&lt;br /&gt;
* Record the details on the viewing page, this will then inform all parties via letter/email&lt;br /&gt;
* If the landlord wants to accept the tenant then click Accept button&lt;br /&gt;
* If the property is Managed you should then create the rental agreement, if not managed change the status to Let when you are ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Managing a rental agreement is covered [[Rental Property Overview|here]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Rental_Step_Through&amp;diff=588</id>
		<title>Rental Step Through</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Rental_Step_Through&amp;diff=588"/>
		<updated>2022-02-16T13:15:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The following guid as a simple how to list, market and add a tenancy to a rental property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entering a new rental property is basically the same process as for sales :-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A landlord contacts you and asks you to market the property&lt;br /&gt;
* You will [[Contacts Overview|add the details of the landlord]] if new to you.&lt;br /&gt;
* You [[Adding a new Rental Property|create a new property listing]] within standout recording some very basic details about the property, and link the landlord to this property.&lt;br /&gt;
* You arrange a valuation visit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have visited the property and got the particulars you then enter them into Standout along with any photos etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* You normally would create a sample brochure and give to the landlord for approval.&lt;br /&gt;
* Once the landlord approves the details you can then change the property status to Available.&lt;br /&gt;
* At this point the property is sent to your web site and any portals you subscribe to.&lt;br /&gt;
* You will then get enquiries for the property, record the details into Standout if they are new to you.&lt;br /&gt;
* Arrange a viewing for the potential tenant.&lt;br /&gt;
* After the viewing has taken place you will either have an offer from the potential tenant or an agreement for the full rental value (or not interested)&lt;br /&gt;
* Record the details on the viewing page, this will then inform all parties via letter/email&lt;br /&gt;
* If the landlord wants to accept the tenant then click Accept button&lt;br /&gt;
* If the property is Managed you should then create the rental agreement, if not managed change the status to Let when you are ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Managing a rental agreement is covered [[Rental Property Overview New|here]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Rental_Step_Through&amp;diff=587</id>
		<title>Rental Step Through</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Rental_Step_Through&amp;diff=587"/>
		<updated>2022-02-16T13:13:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The following guid as a simple how to list, market and add a tenancy to a rental property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entering a new rental property is basically the same process as for sales :-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A landlord contacts you and asks you to market the property&lt;br /&gt;
* You will add the details of the landlord if new to you.&lt;br /&gt;
* You create a new property listing within standout recording some very basic details about the property, and link the landlord to this property.&lt;br /&gt;
* You arrange a valuation visit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have visited the property and got the particulars you then enter them into Standout along with any photos etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* You normally would create a sample brochure and give to the landlord for approval.&lt;br /&gt;
* Once the landlord approves the details you can then change the property status to Available.&lt;br /&gt;
* At this point the property is sent to your web site and any portals you subscribe to.&lt;br /&gt;
* You will then get enquiries for the property, record the details into Standout if they are new to you.&lt;br /&gt;
* Arrange a viewing for the potential tenant.&lt;br /&gt;
* After the viewing has taken place you will either have an offer from the potential tenant or an agreement for the full rental value (or not interested)&lt;br /&gt;
* Record the details on the viewing page, this will then inform all parties via letter/email&lt;br /&gt;
* If the landlord wants to accept the tenant then click Accept button&lt;br /&gt;
* If the property is Managed you should then create the rental agreement, if not managed change the status to Let when you are ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Managing a rental agreement is covered [[Rental Property Overview New|here]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Rental_Step_Through&amp;diff=586</id>
		<title>Rental Step Through</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://standout-wiki.issl.co.uk/index.php?title=Rental_Step_Through&amp;diff=586"/>
		<updated>2022-02-16T13:00:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Paul.Spann: Created page with &amp;quot;The following guid as a simple how to list, market and add a tenancy to a rental property.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The following guid as a simple how to list, market and add a tenancy to a rental property.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Paul.Spann</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>